911-0837 (2023 05)

911-0837

Bard Wall-Mount AC - PLC Module | HVAC Manuals & Specs

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 202 Pages, 10.31MB

911-0837

Literature Assembly 911-0837-1
BOOK 1 OF 2

Contains the following:

2100-479 2100-749(D) 2100-750(E) 7960-420

Leak Test Evacuation Charging Mega-Tec A/C Service Manual Mega-Tec A/C Install Instructions Warranty

SERVICING PROCEDURE
R-410A LEAK TEST EVACUATION CHARGING

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506
Since 1914...Moving ahead, just as planned.

Manual No.: 2100-479

Supersedes: NEW

File:

Volume I, Tab 1

Date:

03-08-07

Manual 2100-479

Page

1 of 11

CONTENTS
General
Recovery Equipment Rated for R-410A....................3 Leak Detectors..........................................................3 Gauge Manifold.........................................................3 Attaching Gauge Manifold.........................................3 Attaching Manifold Hose to Schrader Valve..............4 Leak Test...................................................................4 Evacuation......................................................... 4 & 5 Charging...................................................................5 Preliminary Charging Steps......................................5 Charging the System by Weight...............................5

Troubleshooting the Mechanical System Air Conditioning & Heat Pump - Cooling..............9 Low Suction--Low Head Pressure..........................9 High Suction--Low Head Pressure.........................9 Low Suction--High Head Pressure.........................9 High Suction--High Head Pressure.........................9 Heat Pump - Heating...............................................9 Low Suction--Low Head Pressure..........................9 High Suction--Low Head Pressure.........................9 Low Suction--High Head Pressure.........................9 High Suction--High Head Pressure.........................9

Figures Figure 1: Typical AC System Cooling Cycle..............6 Figure 2: Typical HP System Cooling Cycle.............7 Figure 3: Heating Cycle............................................8

Charts Troubleshooting Chart for Air Conditioners.............10 Troubleshooting Chart for Air-to-Air Heat Pumps.....11

Manual 2100-479 Page 2 of 11

GENERAL

WARNING
The oils used with R-410A refrigerant are hydroscopic and absorb water from the atmosphere readily. Do not leave systems open to the atmosphere for more than 5 minutes. If the system has been open for more than 5 minutes, change the filter dryer immediately before evacuation. Then recharge the system to the factory specified charge.
Recovery equipment rated for R-410A refrigerant R-410A has an ozone depletion potential of zero, but must be reclaimed due to its global warming potential.
The gauge manifold set is specially designed to withstand the higher pressure associated with R-410A. Manifold sets are required to range up to 800 psig on the high side and 250 psig on the low side with a 250 psig low side retard.
All hoses must have a service rating of 800 psig. (This information will be indicated on the hoses.)
Vacuum Pump and micron gauge must be used when evacuating a system to 500 microns.
Leak Detectors An electronic leak detector capable of detecting HFC refrigerant can be used with R-410A refrigerant.

GAUGE MANIFOLD
WARNING
Gauge manifold must be suitable for use with R-410A refrigerant and POE oils.
A necessary instrument in checking and serving air conditioning and heat pump equipment is the gauge manifold. Its purpose is to determine the operating refrigerant pressures in order for the serviceman to analyze the condition of the system.
The valving on the manifold is so arranged that when the valves are closed (front-seated) the center port on the manifold is closed to the gauges and gauge ports. With the valves in the closed position, the gauge ports are still open to the gauges, permitting the gauges to register system pressures. Opening either valve opens the center port to that side of the manifold and system.
ATTACHING GAUGE MANIFOLD
For leak testing, purging, checking charge, charging liquid or evacuating, connect high pressure side of gauge manifold to Schrader valve on liquid or discharge line. Connect suction side of gauge manifold to Schrader valve on suction line. On heat pumps the suction line is between compressor and reversing valve.

Manual 2100-479

Page

3 of 11

ATTACHING MANIFOLD HOSE TO SCHRADER VALVE
WARNING
As a safety measure, it is wise to detach refrigerant hoses at the lowest pressure readings on the system. To do this:
A. Put high pressure hose "B" on first. (Unit should not be running.)
B. Put low pressure hose "A" on second. (Unit should be running.)
1. Remove cap from valve. 2. Make sure gauge manifold valves are closed. 3. If hose does not have an unseating pin, a number 395
Superior or equivalent unseating coupler must be used. 4. Make sure coupler is lined up straight with Schrader
valve. Screw coupler on to valve. 5. Open gauge manifold valve slightly and purge air from
hose with refrigerant. 6. Read the suction pressure on compound gauge and heat
pressure on pressure gauge. 7. To remove, push end of hose tight against end of Schrader
valve and hold in place while quickly unscrewing coupler nut from Schrader valve. 8. Remove coupler from Schrader valve. Replace caps on valve.
Leak Test 1. Remove gauge port cap from suction and liquid service
valve ports and attach manifold gauge hoses. Connect an upright R-410A drum to center port of gauge manifold. Open refrigerant drum valve and manifold high pressure gauge valve to pressurize system to a positive pressure with refrigerant vapor. Pressurize the complete system with dry nitrogen, or CO2 until the pressure reaches 200 psig. Do not exceed 250 psig. 2. Close manifold high pressure gauge valve. Check all soldered joints, including those on the evaporator coil with an Electronic Leak Detector suitable for use with HFC refrigerants or R-410A. If a leak is found which requires soldering, pressure in the system must be bled off since it is impossible to solder with unit pressurized. Be sure all leaks are located and marked before bleeding pressure from system.
Manual 2100-479 Page 4 of 11

3. Close drum valve and disconnect from center port. Release nitrogen or CO2 into the atmosphere through suction line of gauge manifold.
4. Correct any leaks and recheck. When leaks, if any, have been repaired, system is ready to be evacuated and charged. Relieve all pressure from the system down to 0 psig.
5. Change the filter dryer. When leaks, if any, have been repaired, system is ready to be evacuated and charged. Relieve all pressure from the system down to 0 psig.
EVACUATION
Evacuation An evacuation to 500 microns is usually sufficient to remove moisture from a system using R-22 and mineral oil lubricant. A 500 micron evacuation, however, will not separate moisture from Polyol Ester oil (POE) in R-410A systems.
In addition to a 500 micron evacuation, the liquid line filter dryer (R-410A compatible) must be replaced any time the system is open. When removing a filter dryer from a system, do not use a torch; use a tubing cutter to avoid releasing moisture back into the system.
Older R-22 leak detectors, as well as halide torch leak detectors, will not detect leaks in R-410A systems. Never use air and R-410A to leak check, as the mixture may become flammable at pressures above 1 atmosphere. A system can be safely leak-checked by using nitrogen or a trace gas of R-410A and nitrogen. Remember: Always use a pressure regulator with nitrogen and a safety valve down stream - set at no more than 150 psig.
1. Evacuate system to less than 500 microns, using a good vacuum pump and an accurate high vacuum gauge. Operate the pump below 500 microns for 60 minutes and then close valve to the vacuum pump. Allow the system to stand for 30 additional minutes to be sure a 500 micron vacuum or less is maintained.
WARNING
At no time use the compressor to evacuate the system or any part of it.
2. Disconnect charging line at vacuum pump and connect to refrigerant supply. Crack the cylinder valve and purge charging line at center on manifold. Then close cylinder valve.
3. The system is now ready for the correct operating charge of Refrigerant R-410A.

R-410A System Charging Even though R-410A has a very small fractionation potential, it cannot be ignored completely when charging. To avoid fractionation, charging of an air conditioner or heat pump system incorporating R-410A shall be done with "liquid" to maintain optimum system performance. To insure that the proper blend composition is charged into the system, it is important that liquid only be removed from the charging cylinder. Some cylinders supplied by manufacturers have dip tubes, which allow liquid refrigerant to be removed from the cylinder when it is in the upright position. Cylinders without dip tubes have to be tipped upside down in order for liquid to be removed. The Service Technician must differentiate between which type of charging cylinder they are using to avoid removing vapor refrigerant instead of liquid refrigerant to avoid fractionation and for safety concerns.
Connect the gauge manifold to the high and low side. Allow liquid to enter the high side only. The high side will hold 80100% of the total charge. When liquid stops flowing, close high side port. The remainder of the charge will be added to the low side. Keep in mind two issues: first, never start the compressor with less than 55 psig of suction pressure. Secondly, make sure the liquid is throttled, thus vaporized into the low side of the system to avoid compressor damage. A throttling valve can be used to insure that liquid is converted to vapor prior to entering the system. Proper manipulation (restricting) of the manifold gauge set can also act as a throttling device to insure liquid is not entering the compressor.

CHARGING THE SYSTEM BY WEIGHT
1. Connect manifold as instructed.
2. Place refrigerant drum upright on scale and determine exact weight of the refrigerant and cylinder.
3. With manifold suction valve closed and manifold discharge valve open, open refrigerant cylinder liquid valve and allow pressure in system to balance with pressure of cylinder or 80% of charge is in the unit whichever comes first.
4. When there is approximately an 80% charge, front seat (close) the discharge manifold valve and let the system stabilize for about five minutes.
5. Start compressor by setting thermostat.
6. Finish charging with liquid by cracking the suction valve. Open the manifold low pressure valve to allow refrigerant to flow into the system. Throttle the manifold valve to keep pressure about 100 psig for R-410A.
7. When the correct weight of refrigerant has been added to the unit, close refrigerant cylinder valve and allow unit to run for 30 minutes. Refer to Start-Up Procedure and Check List for further start-up details.
8. Front seat gauge manifold valves, disconnect charging and gauge hoses and replace all valve caps.

CHARGING
1. Single Package Units--Refer to the unit serial plate for the full operating charge.

PRELIMINARY CHARGING STEPS
If the system has been open to the atmosphere, the filter dryer should be replaced and then evacuated. Then proceed as follows:
1. Attach a drum of proper, clean refrigerant to the center port of the charging manifold with one of the charging hoses.
2. Attach a second charging hose to the suction gauge (low pressure) side of the gauge manifold.
3. Remove the cap from the suction line valve.
4. Loosely attach the suction gauge hose to the line valve. Open the valve on the refrigerant drum and the suction valve on the charging manifold slightly to purge the air from the manifold and hoses before tightening the fitting.
5. Attach the third hose to the high pressure side of the manifold and the liquid line valve. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above.

Manual 2100-479

Page

5 of 11

FIGURE 1 TYPICAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM COOLING CYCLE

Manual 2100-479 Page 6 of 11

MIS-369

FIGURE 2 TYPICAL HEAT PUMP SYSTEM COOLING CYCLE

MIS-368

Manual 2100-479

Page

7 of 11

WARNING
To speed refrigerant flow, it may be necessary to place refrigerant drum in a pan of warm water (not greater than 130ºF). Remember to either consider the total weight of the pan of water or remove the drum for weighing frequently to keep track of the charging process.
FIGURE 3 HEATING CYCLE

Manual 2100-479 Page 8 of 11

MIS-289

Troubleshooting the Mechanical System

AIR CONDITIONING AND HEAT PUMP -- COOLING

LOW SUCTION--LOW HEAD PRESSURE
1. Restricted airflow over indoor coil. 2. Defective indoor fan motor. 3. Low indoor temperature 4. Iced indoor coil. 5. Restricted liquid line, dryer, metering device, etc. 6. Low charge. 7. Low ambient entering air temperature. (Low entering
water temperature to water coil.)
HIGH SUCTION--LOW HEAD PRESSURE
1. Defective or broken valves. 2. IPRV valve open. 3. Defective reversing valve.

LOW SUCTION--HIGH HEAD PRESSURE
1. Partial restriction and then overcharged.
HIGH SUCTION--HIGH HEAD PRESSURE
1. High entering outdoor air temperature. (High entering water temperature.)
2. Low airflow outdoor coil. (Low water flow.) 3. Overcharged. 4. Air in system. 5. Restricted outdoor coil. (Restricted water coil.) 6. High indoor air temperature.
Water source heat pump.

HEAT PUMP -- HEATING
LOW SUCTION--LOW HEAD PRESSURE
1. Restricted airflow through outdoor coil. (Restricted water flow through water coil.)
2. Defective outdoor motor. (Defective water pump.) 3. Low outdoor air temperature. (Low water
temperature.) 4. Frozen outdoor coil. (Frozen water coil.) 5. Restricted liquid line, dryer, metering device, etc. 6. Low charge. 7. Low indoor air temperature.
HIGH SUCTION--LOW HEAD PRESSURE
1. Defective or broken valves. 2. IPR valve open. 3. Defective reversing valve.

LOW SUCTION--HIGH HEAD PRESSURE
1. Partial restriction and then overcharged.
HIGH SUCTION--HIGH HEAD PRESSURE
1. High entering outdoor air temperature. (High entering water temperature.)
2. Low indoor airflow. 3. Overcharged. 4. Air in system. 5. Restricted air coil. 6. High indoor air temperature.
Water source heat pump.

Manual 2100-479

Page

9 of 11

MMaannuualal 2211000-0-447799 PPaaggee 1100ofof1111

y Generally the cause. Always make these checks first.
Occasionally the cause. Make these checks only if first checks fail to locate trouble.
Rarely the cause. Make this check only if previous checks fail to locate trouble.
Compressor and condenser fan motor will not start Compressor will not start but condenser fan will run Condenser fan motor will not start
Compressor "hums" but will not start
Compressor cycles on overload
Compressor short cycles on low pressure
Compressor runs continuously--no cooling
Compressor runs continuously --cooling
Compressor noisy
Compressor loses oil
Head pressure too high
Head pressure too low
Liquid line frosting or sweating
Suction pressure too high
Suction pressure too low
Evaporator frosting
Suction line frosting or sweating
Evaporator blower will not start
Condenser fan motor runs contactor not pulled in Liquid refrigerant flooding back to compressor-- cap tube system Space temperature too high

Meter to Line Side of Contactor

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART FOR AIR CONDITIONERS

Power Supply
Load Side of Contactor to Motor Terminal

Control Circuit

Motors

Power Failure Blown Fuses or Tripped Circuit Breakers Faulty Wiring Loose Terminals Low Voltage Single 1PH Failure of 3PH Unbalanced Power Supply 3PH Voltage Too High Open Disconnect Switch Faulty Wiring Loose Terminal Low Voltage Defective Contacts in Contactor Compressor Overload Potential Relay Fails to Open Potential Relay Fails to Close Run Capacitor Start Capacitor Faulty Wiring Loose Terminals Control Transformer Low Voltage Thermostat Contactor Coil Pressure Control Condenser Fan Relay Evaporator Fan Relay Compressor Motor Condenser Motor Evaporator Motor Compressor Off on Internal Overload
Hold Down Bolts Defective Compressor Bearings Seized Compressor Defective Compressor Valves Compressor Oil Level Open or Short Motor Windings Refrigerant Charge Low
Overcharge of Refrigerant High Head Pressure High Suction Pressure Low Suction Pressure Temperatures Non-Condensables (Air, etc.) Excessive Load in Space Liquid Valve Partially Closed Condenser Fins Dirty or Plugged Condenser Fan Belt Slipping Condenser Air Short Circuiting Low Condenser Air Volume Condenser Air Temperature Low
Plugged or Restricted Metering Device Evaporator Fins Dirty or Plugged Evaporator Belt Slipping Low Evaporator Air Volume Dirty Filters Ductwork Small or Restricted Restrictions Thermostat Setting Thermostat Location Stratified Air in Space Incorrect Refrigerant Piping System Too Small

Compressor

High Pressure Side of System System Operation

Condenser Air

Low Side Evaporator Air

General

PPaagg ee

1111 ooff 1111

MMaannuualal 22110000--447799

Heating Cycle

Cooling Cycle

Heating or Cooling Cycles

y Denotes
common cause.
Denotes
occasional cause.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART FOR AIR TO AIR HEAT PUMPS

Compressor and O.D. fan motor do not operate Compressor will not run O.D. fan motor runs Compressor "hums" but will not start
Compressor cycles on overload
Compressor off on high pressure control
Compressor noisy
Head pressure too high
Head pressure too low
Suction pressure too high
Suction pressure too low
I.D. blower will not start
I.D. coil frosting or icing-
High compressor amps
Compressor runs continuously--no cooling Liquid refrigerant flooding back to compressor Compressor runs continuously--no heating
Defrost cycle initiates no ice on coil
Reversing valve does not shift Ice build up on lower part of O.D. coil Liquid refrigerant flooding back to compressor Auxiliary heat on I.D. blower off
Excessive operating costs
Excessive ice on O.D. coil

Line Voltage

Power Supply

Control Circuit

Compressor

Refrigerant System

Power Failure Blown Fuse or Tripped Breaker Faulty Wiring Loose Terminals Low Voltage Single 1PH Failure of 3PH Unbalanced 3PH Defective Contacts in Contactor Compressor Overload Potential Relay Run Capacitor Start Capacitor Faulty Wiring Loose Terminals Control Transformer Low Voltage Thermostat Contactor Coil Pressure Control or Impedance Relay Indoor Fan Relay Discharge Line Hitting Inside of Shell Bearings Defective Seized Valve Defective Motor Windings Defective Refrigerant Charge Low Refrigerant Overcharge High Head Pressure Low Head Pressure High Suction Pressure Low Suction Pressure Non-Condensables Unequalized Pressures Sensing Bulb Loose-Poorly Located Cycle Too Long (Clock timer) Defective Control, Timer or Relay Leaking Defective Valve or Coil Sticking Closed Leaking or Defective
Plugged or Restricted Meter Device (Htg)
Fins Dirty or Plugged Motor Winding Defective Recirculation or Air Air Volume Low (Cooling) Low Temperature Coil Air (Cooling)
Plugged or Restricted Metering Device (Clg)
Fins Dirty or Plugged Motor Winding Defective Air Volume Low Air Filters Dirty Undersized or Restricted Ductwork Sticking Closed Leaking or Defective Auxiliary Heat Upstream of Coil

Outdoor Section

Defrost Control

Rev. Valve

Check Valve

Outdoor Fan Motor and Coil

Indoor Section
Indoor Blower Motor and Coil

Aux. Heat Check

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
MEGA-TEC® Wall-Mount Air Conditioner
Models: W180B

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506 www.bardhvac.com

Manual:

2100-749D

Supersedes: 2100-749C

Date:

3-27-23

Page

1 of 69

CONTENTS

General Information................................................................ 4 Multi-Stage Cooling System.................................................. 4 Wall-Mount Air Conditioner Units.......................................... 4 General.............................................................................. 4 Shipping Damage................................................................ 4 Additional Publications........................................................ 4
Using the TEC-EYETM................................................................ 6 TEC-EYE Hand-Held Service Tool.......................................... 6 TEC-EYE Acronyms.......................................................... 7 Main Status Screen......................................................... 7 Quick Menu.................................................................... 7 Setpoints.................................................................... 7 Information................................................................. 9 Air Path Information................................................. 9 A/C Circuit Information............................................. 9 24 Hour Run Time................................................. 10 Software Version.................................................... 10 Software Versioning Guide...................................... 11 Alarm Log................................................................. 11 Executing a Self Test..................................................... 11 Self Test Parameter Descriptions................................. 11 Reset to Factory Defaults............................................... 12 Configuration File.......................................................... 12
Operation................................................................................. 13 Unit On/Off....................................................................... 13 Alarm Adjustment............................................................. 13 Acknowledging Alarms................................................... 13 Clearing Alarms............................................................. 13 Clearing Alarm Logs and Counters................................... 13 Exporting Alarm Logs..................................................... 13 Exporting 7 Day Logs..................................................... 14 Unit Address and Zone....................................................... 14 Temperature Control.......................................................... 14 Temperature Control Components.................................... 14 Return Air Temperature Sensor................................... 14 Return Air Temperature Sensor Alarm...................... 14 Temperature Control Operation....................................... 15 Orphan Mode............................................................ 15 LC6000 Control........................................................ 15 Cooling..................................................................... 15 Heating.................................................................... 16 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)........................................ 17 EEV Components........................................................... 17 Electronic Expansion Valve......................................... 17 EEV Instructions for Vacuum, Reclaim, Charge Unit... 17 System Pressures................................................... 18 Suction Pressure Transducer....................................... 18 Troubleshooting the Suction Pressure Transducer...... 18 Suction Pressure Alarm.......................................... 18 Suction Temperature Sensor....................................... 18 Suction Temperature Sensor Alarm.......................... 19 EEV Operation.............................................................. 19 EEV Superheat Control............................................... 19 Additional EEV Alarms................................................... 19 Low Superheat Alarm................................................. 19 Indoor Airflow................................................................... 19 Indoor Airflow Components............................................. 19 Blower...................................................................... 19 Blower Status Switch................................................. 21 Blower Status Alarm............................................... 22 Filters....................................................................... 22 Dirty Filter Switch...................................................... 22 Dirty Filter Alarm................................................... 22 Filter Indicator Light.................................................. 23 Indoor Airflow Operation................................................. 24 Blower Speed Control................................................. 24 Freeze Condition Operation..................................... 24 High Sensible Operation......................................... 24 Balanced ClimateTM Operation................................. 24 Additional Indoor Airflow Alarms..................................... 25 Supply Air Temperature Sensor Alarm.......................... 25
Manual 2100-749D Page 2 of 69

Condenser Fan.................................................................. 25 Condenser Fan Components........................................... 25 Condenser Fan.......................................................... 25 Liquid Pressure Sensor.............................................. 25 Troubleshooting the Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer............................................................ 26 Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer Alarm............. 26 Liquid Temperature Sensor......................................... 26 Outdoor Temperature Sensor....................................... 26 Condenser Fan Operation............................................... 26 Condenser Fan Speed Control..................................... 26
Compressor....................................................................... 27 Compressor Components................................................ 27 Compressor............................................................... 27 Compressor Control Module (CCM).............................. 27 Delay-on-Make Timer.............................................. 27 Short Cycle Protection/Delay-on-Break..................... 27 High Pressure Detection......................................... 27 Test Mode............................................................. 28 Brownout Protection w/Adjustment.............................. 28 High Pressure Safety Switch....................................... 29 Refrigerant High Pressure Alarm.............................. 29 Phase Monitor........................................................... 29 Crankcase Heater...................................................... 29 Compressor Operation.................................................... 29 Additional Compressor Alarms........................................ 30 Refrigerant Low Pressure Alarm.................................. 30
Economizer....................................................................... 31 Economizer Components................................................ 31 Actuator................................................................... 31 Dust Sensor.............................................................. 31 Dust Sample......................................................... 32 Dust Sensor Failure Alarm...................................... 32 High Dust Limit Alarm............................................ 32 Damper Blade........................................................... 33 Damper Switch.......................................................... 33 Damper Failed to Open Alarm................................. 34 Damper Failed to Close Alarm................................. 34 Outdoor Temperature and Humidity Combination Sensor...................................................................... 34 Outdoor Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm................. 35 Outdoor Humidity Sensor Failure Alarm................... 35 Mixed Air Temperature Sensor.................................... 35 High Mixed Air Temperature Alarm.......................... 35 Low Mixed Air Temperature Alarm........................... 35 Economizer Operation.................................................... 35 Economizer Operation - Minimum Position.................. 37
Miscellaneous Components................................................ 38 Supply Temperature Sensor............................................ 38 Supply Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm........................... 38
Emergency Cooling Mode................................................... 38 Emergency Cooling - Orphan Mode................................. 38
Emergency Ventilation Mode............................................... 39 Electric Heat Option.......................................................... 39
Electric Heat Components.............................................. 39 Electric Heating Element............................................ 39 Thermal Overload...................................................... 40
Electric Heat Operation.................................................. 40 Electric Reheat Dehumidification........................................ 40
Electric Reheat Dehumidification Operation..................... 40 Unit Disable Option........................................................... 41 Serial/Model Number Configuration..................................... 42 Refrigerant Information....................................................... 44 General............................................................................ 44 Topping Off System Charge................................................ 44 Safety Practices................................................................ 44 Important Installer Note..................................................... 44 R410-A Refrigerant Charge................................................ 44 Pressure Service Ports....................................................... 45 Maintenance & Troubleshooting......................................... 46 Standard Maintenance Procedures...................................... 46

8301-089 Outdoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor................ 49 8301-089 Sensor Connections....................................... 49 8301-089 Outdoor Temperature Sensor Troubleshooting... 50 8301-089 Humidity Sensor Test Value Outputs................ 52 8301-089 Outdoor Humidity Sensor Troubleshooting....... 52
8620-296 Supply Air Sensor/Return Air Sensor/Mixed Air Sensor/Suction Sensor/Liquid Sensor..................................... 54 8301-057 Blower Status Switch/Dirty Filter Switch.................. 55 Compressor Solenoid......................................................... 56
Compressor Solenoid Test Procedures.............................. 56 8612-064 Dust (Particulate) Sensor Control Board............... 57
8612-064 Control Board Output Signal Not Responsive.... 57 8301-091 Dust (Particulate) Sensor................................... 58 Variable Speed Blower/Condensate Fan................................ 59
Maintenance................................................................. 59 LED Warning/Status Codes............................................. 60 Modbus Troubleshooting.................................................... 61 Alarm Index...................................................................... 64 I/O Layout......................................................................... 68

FIGURES

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12
Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23
Figure 24
Figure 25
Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37
Figure 38 Figure 39
Figure 40
Figure 41 Figure 42
Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46

TEC-EYE Display and Interface............................ 6 TEC-EYE Connection to Unit Control..................... 6 Quick Menu Icons............................................... 7 Cool and Heat Setpoints...................................... 9 MEGA-TEC Air Paths and Refrigeration Circuits....... 9 Unit Air Path Information.................................... 9 Last 24 Hour Tracking....................................... 10 A/C Circuit Measurements................................. 10 Software Version............................................... 11 Executing Self Test........................................... 11 Restoring Factory Default Settings...................... 12 Restoring Factory Default Settings Remove USB Device......................................... 12 Clearing All Alarms........................................... 13 Clearing Alarm Logs and Counters...................... 13 Changing Zone................................................. 14 Adjusting Return Air Temperature Sensor............... 14 Cooling (with Economizer)................................. 15 Cooling (without Economizer)............................. 16 Heating........................................................... 16 Adjusting Cooling Differentials........................... 16 Adjusting Heating Differentials.......................... 17 Overriding EEV Output...................................... 17 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) and Service Tool..................................................... 17 Adjusting Suction Sensor/Transducer Pressure Values................................................ 18 Voltage to Pressure: Suction Pressure Transducer....................................................... 18 Adjusting Suction Temperature Sensor Values...... 19 Putting Blower Output into Override Mode.......... 19 Verifying Blower Speeds State............................ 20 Adjusting Emergency Vent and Freeze Speeds....... 20 Putting Blower into Custom Blower Mode............. 20 Custom Blower Screens..................................... 21 Dirty Filter Switch and Blower Status Switch....... 22 Verifying Differential Airflow Status.................... 22 Dirty Filter Switch and Filter Indicator Light........ 23 Verifying Filter Light Status............................... 23 Overriding Fliter Light Output............................ 24 Enabling/Disabling High Sensible or Balanced Climate Operation.............................. 25 Enabling Fan Override....................................... 25 Adjusting Discharge/Liquid Transducer Pressure Values................................................ 26 Voltage to Pressure: Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer.......................................... 26 Adjusting Discharge/Liquid Temperature Input....... 26 Condenser Fan Discharge/Liquid Pressure Setpoint............................................................. 27 8201-171 Compressor Control Module.................. 28 Adjusting Compressor Delays............................. 30 Verifying Compressor Output Status.................... 30 Overriding Compressor Outputs.......................... 30

Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76
Figure 77 Figure 78
Figure 79 Figure 80
Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95
TABLES
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15
Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20

Damper Override.............................................. 31 Dust Sensor..................................................... 31 Verifying Dust Sample Output Status.................. 32 Overriding Dust Sample Output.......................... 32 Adjusting Dust Sensor Alarm Setpoint................... 32 W180 Damper Blades....................................... 33 Damper Blade Position...................................... 33 Damper Switch................................................. 34 Outdoor Temperature Sensor.............................. 34 Outdoor Humidity Sensor.................................. 34 Mixed Air Temperature Sensors.......................... 35 Economizer Setup............................................ 36 Economizer Setup Dry Bulb Control................... 37 Economizer Setup TempHum Control................. 37 Economizer Setup Enthalpy Control..................... 37 Supply Air Temperature Sensor.......................... 38 Emergency Cool - Orphan Mode........................ 38 Adjusting Return Air Alarm Settings................... 39 Verifying Electric Heat Output Status.................. 39 Overriding Electric Heat Output......................... 39 Electric Reheat Dehumidification....................... 40 Dehumidification Control (°F)............................ 40 Unit Disable Option.......................................... 41 Verifying Damper Power Output Status................ 41 Overriding Damper Output................................. 42 Serial/Model Number Configuration.................... 42 MEGA-TEC Model Nomenclature........................ 43 Sensors and Peripheral Devices.......................... 47 Supply and Return Air Sensors........................... 48 8301-089 Sensor Electrical Connections and DIP Switches............................................. 49 8301-089 Sensor Terminal Connections ............ 49 8301-089 Sensor: Temperature Probe Troubleshooting................................................ 50 8301-089 DIP Switch/Output Configuration.......... 52 8301-089 Sensor: Humidity Probe Troubleshooting................................................ 52 8301-057 Air Differential Switch....................... 55 Compressor Solenoid Location........................... 56 8612-064 Dust Sensor Alarm Board.................. 57 Fan Terminals.................................................. 59 PLC Communication Wires................................. 61 Expansion Module Communication Wires............. 61 Blower/Condenser Fan Communication Wires....... 61 Communication Wires in Terminal Block............. 62 DIP Switch Location......................................... 62 Correct DIP Switch Settings.................................. 62 TEC-EYE Blower 1 Screen................................. 62 TEC-EYE Condenser Fan 1 Screen...................... 63 Ventilation Airflow Paths.................................... 67 I/O Layout........................................................ 68 I/O Layout........................................................ 69
TEC-EYE Menu Structure.................................... 7 LC6000/TEC-EYE Passwords (Defaults).................... 7 Unit Status Messages......................................... 8 Software Versioning Guide................................. 11 Unit Specific Superheat Setpoints...................... 19 Rated Airflow................................................... 21 Indoor Blower Performance................................ 21 Maximum ESP of Operation: Electric Heat Only... 21 W180 Blower Speed Settings............................ 24 Condenser Fan Nominal Speed.......................... 27 Economizer Default Settings.............................. 37 W180 Cooling Pressures................................... 45 8301-089 Sensor: Temperature/Resistance.......... 51 8301-089 Sensor: Humidity/mA........................ 53 8620-296 Sensor: Temperature/Resistance Curve J............................................................ 54 Solenoid Coil Resistance................................... 56 8301-091 Sensor: Dust/Volts............................ 58 Blower/Condenser Fan Troubleshooting............... 60 Blower/Condenser Fan Motor Flash Codes........... 60 Modbus Device Communication Wires................ 61

Manual 2100-749D

Page

3 of 69

GENERAL INFORMATION

Multi-Stage Cooling System
The Bard air conditioning system is composed of MEGA-TEC wall-mounted air conditioners matched with an LC6000 supervisory controller or Bard PGD/ PGDx stand-alone display. If only one wall-mounted air conditioner is being used, it can be matched with either the LC6000 supervisory controller or a stand-alone display. If more than one wall-mount unit is installed, the LC6000 controller must be matched with the air conditioning units. The wall mounts are specifically engineered for telecom/motor control center rooms.
NOTE: The LC6000 supervisory controller or stand-alone display and MEGA-TEC Series wall-mount units are designed specifically to work together. The controller or stand-alone display cannot run other brands of systems, nor can other controllers run the MEGA-TEC Series wall-mount units. They are a complete system, and must be used together. See manual 2100-669 for more information about the LC6000 controller, manual 2100-734 for the PGD and manual 2100-740 for the PGDx.
Wall-Mount Air Conditioner Units
The wall-mount units operate on VAC power. If equipped with an economizer, the units will supply full rated cooling airflow in free cooling mode with ability to exhaust the same amount through the unit itself without any additional relief openings in the shelter.
MEGA-TEC units are fully charged with refrigerant and are available with optional electric heat and/or electric reheat dehumidification.
NOTE: 575V models take incoming field power and step-down secondary to 460V which supplies most components except compressors and electric heat which remain 575V. Reference wiring diagrams for more information.
General
The equipment covered in this manual is to be installed by trained, experienced service and installation technicians.
The refrigerant system is completely assembled and charged. All internal wiring is complete.
The unit is designed for use without duct work. Flanges are provided for transition from unit to wall grilles.
These instructions and any instructions packaged with any separate equipment required to make up the entire air conditioning system should be carefully read before beginning the installation. Note particularly any tags and/or labels attached to the equipment.
While these instructions are intended as a general recommended guide, they do not supersede any national and/or local codes in any way. Authorities having
Manual 2100-749D Page 4 of 69

jurisdiction should be consulted before the installation is made. See Additional Publications for information on codes and standards.
Sizing of systems for proposed installation should be based on heat loss and heat gain calculations made according to methods of Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA). The supply flange should be installed in accordance with the Standards of the National Fire Protection Association for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems of Other Than Residence Type, NFPA No. 90A, and Residence Type Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems, NFPA No. 90B. Where local regulations are at a variance with instructions, installer should adhere to local codes.
Shipping Damage
Upon receipt of equipment, the cartons should be checked for external signs of shipping damage. If damage is found, the receiving party must contact the last carrier immediately, preferably in writing, requesting inspection by the carrier's agent.
These units must remain in upright position at all times; do not lay on side. Do not stack units.
Additional Publications
These publications can help when installing the air conditioner. They can usually be found at the local library or purchased directly from the publisher. Be sure to consult the current edition of each standard.
National Electrical Code.......................ANSI/NFPA 70
Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ....................ANSI/NFPA 90A
Standard for Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.............ANSI/NFPA 90B
Load Calculation for Residential Winter and Summer Air Conditioning.............. ACCA Manual J
For more information, contact these publishers:
Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA) 1712 New Hampshire Ave. N.W. Washington, DC 20009 Telephone: (202) 483-9370 Fax: (202) 234-4721
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 11 West Street, 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 Telephone: (212) 642-4900 Fax: (212) 302-1286
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 Telephone: (404) 636-8400 Fax: (404) 321-5478

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Batterymarch Park P. O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9901 Telephone: (800) 344-3555 Fax: (617) 984-7057
ANSI Z535.5 Definitions:
DANGER: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. The signal word "DANGER" is to be limited to the most extreme situations. DANGER [signs] should not be used for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to these levels is also involved.
WARNING: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING [signs] should not be used for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to this level is also involved.
CAUTION: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION [signs] without a safety alert symbol may be used to alert against unsafe practices that can result in property damage only.
NOTICE: [this header is] preferred to address practices not related to personal injury. The safety alert symbol shall not be used with this signal word. As an alternative to "NOTICE" the word "CAUTION" without the safety alert symbol may be used to indicate a message not related to personal injury.

! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Have a properly trained individual perform these tasks. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.
! WARNING
Fire hazard. Maintain minimum 1/4" clearance between the supply flange and combustible materials. Failure to do so could result in fire causing damage, injury or death.
! WARNING
Heavy item hazard. Use more than one person to handle unit. Failure to do so could result in unit damage or serious injury.

! CAUTION
Cut hazard.
Wear gloves to avoid contact with sharp edges. Failure to do so could result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT
When connecting this product from a remote location, ensure that the network connection is secure and reliable.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

5 of 69

USING THE TEC-EYETM
FIGURE 1 TEC-EYE (Bard P/N 8301-059) Display and Interface (Status Screen Shown)

ALARM KEY

UP KEY

MENU KEY

ENTER KEY

ESCAPE KEY

DOWN KEY

ALARM KEY Allows viewing of active alarms Silences audible alarms Resets active alarms
MENU KEY Allows entry to Main Menu
ESCAPE KEY Returns to previous menu level Cancels a changed entry

QUICK MENU
UP KEY Steps to next screen in the display menu Changes (increases) the value of a modifiable field
ENTER KEY Accepts current value of a modifiable field Advances cursor
DOWN KEY Steps back to previous screen in the display menu Changes (decreases) the value of a modifiable field

TEC-EYE Hand-Held Service Tool
The TEC-EYE service tool is used to communicate with the MEGA-TEC unit logic board. By connecting directly to the logic board inside the unit control panel, it is possible to perform diagnostics on the unit, adjust certain settings and verify unit and economizer operation through a self test procedure. The TEC-EYE service tool is required for unit setup and operation. The TEC-EYE is supplied with the LC6000 controller but can also be ordered separately (Bard P/N 8301059).
The menu driven interface provides users the ability to scroll through two menu levels: Quick Menu and Main Menu. The menus permit the user to easily view, control and configure the unit. See Figure 1 for TECEYE display and key functions.
The controller is completely programmed at the factory; the default setpoints and their ranges are easily viewed and adjusted from the TEC-EYE display. The program and operating parameters are permanently stored on FLASH-MEMORY in case of power failure.
The TEC-EYE connects to the wall-mount unit control board via an RJ11 modular phone connector as shown in Figure 2.

FIGURE 2 TEC-EYE Connection to Unit Control

Modular Connector for TEC-EYE Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool

MIS-3953

When not being used, the TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool should be stored inside or near the LC6000 controller. Do not let the TEC-EYE leave the shelter.
NOTE: Screenshots shown in this manual reflect default settings (when applicable).

Manual 2100-749D Page 6 of 69

TABLE 1 TEC-EYE Menu Structure

Menu/Screen Structure
Quick Menu Setpoints (Orphan Mode Temperature Control) Information Alarm Log
Main Menu System Config Adv. Sys. Config I/O Config
Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Fan/Blowers Manual EEV On/Off Alarm Logs Settings Date/Time Initialization Change Passwords Logout

Password Level Required
None None None
User Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician
User User
-Technician Technician
Varies --

TABLE 2 LC6000/TEC-EYE Passwords (Defaults)

User

2000

Technician

1313

Engineer

9254

Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter password. The passwords listed above are the default passwords. End users can change these passwords if additional security is desired.

TEC-EYE Acronyms
MAT Mixed air temperature RAT Return air temperature SAT Supply air temperature

OAT Outdoor air temperature OAH Outdoor air humidity Blower Indoor blower speed Fan Outdoor fan speed Damper Free cooling
Main Status Screen
The main Status screen is the default start-up screen and also the return screen after 5 minutes of no activity. The screen can be accessed at any time by pressing the ESCAPE key repeatedly.
The wall-mount unit address is displayed in the upper right corner on the main Status screen (see Figure 1). The main Status screen also shows the current date, return air temperature (RAT), outdoor air temperature (OAT) and unit status. See Table 3 on page 8 for wallmount unit status messages.
The Quick Menu is accessible from the main Status screen. Setpoints, Information and Alarm Log are available through the Quick Menu. Pressing the UP or DOWN keys while on the main Status screen will change the Quick Menu icon displayed (see Figure 3). Press the ENTER key when the desired icon is displayed.

Alarm Log

FIGURE 3 Quick Menu Icons
Information

Setpoints

Quick Menu
Setpoints
From this screen, the local unit heating and cooling setpoints can be changed.
Once the supervisory controller is connected, cooling and heating setpoints will be communicated and local cooling and heating setpoints will be replaced with the communicated cooling and heating setpoints.
If at any time the wall-mount unit(s) loses communication with the LC6000 controller, the wallmount unit(s) will go into orphan mode and operate using the last communicated setpoints.
To verify or change the wall-mount unit cooling and heating setpoints in orphan mode:
1. Connect the TEC-EYE diagnostic tool to the control board located in the unit.
2. From the Status screen, press UP or DOWN key until Quick Menu displays Setpoints icon. Press ENTER key.
3. Press ENTER key to scroll to the selected choice (see Figure 4 on page 9).
4. Press UP or DOWN key on desired value until value displays correctly.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

7 of 69

TABLE 3 Unit Status Messages

Message

Description

Orphan Mode

This message will be shown when unit is not connected to the LC or stand-alone display. The unit is not operating when this message is shown but is ready to heat or cool based on the return air temperature. Blower will run continuously in this mode.

This message will be shown when the unit is communicating with stand-alone display. The unit Standalone Mode is not operating when this message is shown but is ready to heat or cool based on the display
temperature sensor.

LC Online Cont. Blower Comfort Mode Freecooling Passive Dehum
Cooling

This message will be shown when the unit is communicating with the LC6000. The unit is not operating when this message is shown but is ready to respond to any call or event from the LC.
The message will be shown when the unit has been commanded to run the blower continuously by the LC6000 or the stand-alone display.
This message will be shown when the unit has been put into comfort mode by the stand-alone display.
This message will be shown when the unit is utilizing the economizer to cool the space.
This message will be shown when the unit is connected to the LC6000 or stand-alone display and the economizer is disabled and blower speeds have been lowered to optimize moisture removal.
This message will be shown when the unit is operating the air conditioning system to cool the space.

Heating Optimized

This message will be shown when the unit is operating the electric heaters to warm the space.
This message will be shown when the unit is operating both the economizer and the air conditioning simultaneously to cool the space.

Active Dehum

This message will be shown when the unit is connected to the LC6000 or stand-alone display, no heating or cooling calls are required and the air conditioner and electric heat are being used together to remove moisture from the space.

Self Test

This message will be shown when the self test has been activated and component operations are being verified.

Off by Alarm

This message will be shown when the blower, fan or expansion module are no longer communicating with the main controller. Also, when unit disable, emergency off or no return sensor is detected in orphan mode.

Emergency Vent Emergency Cool Emergency Off
Off by LC

Off by PGDx This message will be shown when connected to the stand-alone display and the unit is turned off.

Off by Keyboard This message will be shown when unit has been turned off at unit.

Model Invalid This message will be shown when a valid model number is not entered into the controller.

Manual 2100-749D Page 8 of 69

5. Press ENTER key to save and scroll to next parameter.
6. Press ESCAPE key until Main Menu screen is displayed.
FIGURE 4 Cool and Heat Setpoints

Information
The information screens are used as a quick reference to show unit A/C circuit measurements and program version.
Air Path Information
MEGA-TEC Series wall-mounted 15 ton air conditioners use two separate air paths: Air path 1 is tied to A/C circuit 1 and is located on the left side of the unit when viewed from the outdoor side and air path 2 is tied to A/C circuit 2 and is located on the right side of the unit when viewed from the outdoor side (see Figure 5).

FIGURE 5 MEGA-TEC Air Paths and Refrigeration Circuits

CIRCUIT 1 LEFT HAND

CIRCUIT 2 RIGHT HAND

Both air paths share a single return air temperature sensor located in the return duct opening, but each air path has its own mixed air temperature sensor and supply air temperature sensor.
Unit air path and outdoor conditions can be found on three screens within the information menu (see Figure 6). The information and measurements provided are return air temperature, air path specific mixed air temperature (economizer-equipped units only), air path specific supply air temperature, air path specific blower speed, affiliated A/C circuit condenser fan speed and damper position (economizer-equipped only). Outdoor conditions provided include outdoor temperature, outdoor humidity, calculated outdoor dew point, dust concentration (economizer-equipped units only with dust sensor enabled) and damper position (economizerequipped units only).
FIGURE 6 Unit Air Path Information

FRONT VIEW

MIS-4034 A

A/C Circuit Information
MEGA-TEC Series wall-mounted air conditioners have two separate refrigeration circuits: Circuit 1 is located on the left side of the unit and circuit 2 is on the right side (see Figure 5).

Manual 2100-749D

Page

9 of 69

Circuit 1 utilizes a 2 stage scroll compressor while circuit 2 uses a single stage compressor. Both circuits are equipped with an electronic expansion valve that is used to control superheat of each circuit. Liquid temperature and pressure are measured to provide a calculated subcooling for each circuit. Suction temperature and pressure are also measured to provide a calculated superheat for each circuit.
Using both circuit 1 and circuit 2, the MEGA-TEC unit can provide 35%, 80% and 100% cooling capacity. Separate refrigeration circuits also allow for operation of the unit at partial capacity if service is required on one circuit.
A/C Circuit Information can be found in four screens within the information menu (see Figure 8). The information and measurements provided are liquid line temperature, liquid line pressure, condensing saturated temperature, suction line temperature, suction line pressures, suction saturated temperature, super heat, subcooling and electronic expansion valve position.
24 Hour Run Time
The Last 24 Hour Tracking screens display unit run times over the last 24 hour period (see Figure 7). The Run column displays the active times the component(s) were in ON state, while the St (Start) column shows the number of starts or times the component changed from an OFF to an ON state.
FIGURE 7 Last 24 Hour Tracking

FIGURE 8 A/C Circuit Measurements

Manual 2100-749D Page 10 of 69

Software Version
The Software Version screen displays all program version information for the PLC (see Figure 9). This information can be used to determine whether a software update may be required.

FIGURE 9 Software Version

Software Versioning Guide MGS1000.X.Y.Z
Software Name: The name of the software is the base part number used to identify which product the software is used in.
TABLE 4 Software Versioning Guide

Product MULTI-TEC FUSION-TEC (WR) MEGA-TEC LC6000

Software Name MTS1000 WTS1000 MGS1000 LCS6000

X: The letter X represents a major change to the software effecting product compatibility or function of the equipment.
Y: The letter Y represents a minor change to the software that either adds, removes or alters a feature of the equipment.
Z: The letter Z represents a change to the software that fixes existing features or user interface.

Alarm Log
The alarm log screens show a log of each alarm. There will be a log for when alarm occurred and if the alarm auto clears, it will show when the alarm cleared. See page 13 for information on clearing alarms.
Executing a Self Test
This unit has the ability to perform a self test that will operate all available unit functions in order to quickly determine unit operation. With the exception of step times, self test parameters are not adjustable.
The self test will automatically skip sections of the test based on the model number entered into the controller. If position 10 of the model number is B (to indicate "no vent" option), the economizer open and close steps will be skipped. If positions 8 and 9 of the model number indicate a 0Z (0 kW) option, steps G,H and I will be skipped. If position 8 and 9 indicate a 09 (9 kW) option, step H will be skipped.
To execute a self test:
1. Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Self Test A11 screen.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable parameter (see Figure 10).
6. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes. The self test will begin.
FIGURE 10 Executing Self Test

Manual 2100-749D

Page

11 of 69

Self Test Off Initializing... Opening Dampers Closing Dampers Compressor 1 On Compressor 1 & 2 On C1 Full Load + C2 On Turning Comp. Off.... Electric Heat 1 On Electric Heat 1 & 2 On Turning Heat Off... End The unit will determine which items to test based on the unit model number. Reset to Factory Defaults To reset to factory default settings: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
ENGINEER password 9254. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press
ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization;
press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to the DEFAULT
INSTALLATION screen. 6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Reset to Factory
Defaults: (see Figure 11).
FIGURE 11 Restoring Factory Default Settings

FIGURE 12 Restoring Factory Default Settings
Remove USB Device
Configuration File The controller will automatically save all of the configured parameters to a file that can be accessed by connecting a laptop to the controller with a micro USB cable. This file can be used to copy the setting of one board to another board. The file is located in the main directory of the controller and is labeled "MG_Config". Copy this file to a location on the laptop and then disconnect from the first board. Connect to the second board and copy the file to the second board. Disconnect the laptop from the second board and power cycle the controller. The second board will now have the same settings as the first board.

7. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to YES; press ENTER key.
8. System will restart with default values. The controller can only be factory reset when the USB port is not in use. When the USB port is in use, a message will appear and the option to reset factory defaults will not be available (see Figure 12).
Manual 2100-749D Page 12 of 69

OPERATION

Unit On/Off
The wall-mount unit can be turned on and off from the TEC-EYE. Turning the unit off with the following instructions will disable all unit operation.
To turn the unit on or off:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to On/Off; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to change value from On to Off or from Off to On.
5. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
The wall-mount unit may also be turned off by certain events such as the unit disable input (if enabled), blower offline/loss of communication, fan offline/loss of communication, panel removed or the return air temperature sensor failure when not connected to the LC6000.
The unit can also be manually turned off by the PGDx and the LC6000.
Alarm Adjustment
Acknowledging Alarms
On the standard TEC-EYE included with the LC6000 controller (Bard P/N 8301-059), alarm conditions are enunciated by an audible alarm signal. On the larger TEC-EYE (Bard P/N 8301-053), alarm conditions activate a red LED indicator that backlights the ALARM function key. An alarm is acknowledged by pressing the ALARM key. This calls up alarm display screen(s) that provide a text message detailing the alarm condition(s).
Clearing Alarms
Alarms can only be cleared after the alarm condition has been corrected. To clear a single alarm, press and hold the ALARM key for 3 seconds while viewing a specific alarm screen. To clear all alarms, navigate to the screen at the end of the alarm list (shown in Figure 13) and press and hold the ALARM key for 3 seconds.

FIGURE 13 Clearing All Alarms
Clearing Alarm Logs and Counters To clear the alarm log and alarm counters: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
USER password 2000. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press
ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization;
press ENTER key. (Alarm initialization screen will be displayed.) 5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Delete alarm logs? (see Figure 14). 6. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to YES; press ENTER key. 7. Press ENTER key to scroll to Clear AutoReset counters? 8. Press UP or DOWN key to value to YES; press ENTER key.
FIGURE 14 Clearing Alarm Logs and Counters

Exporting Alarm Logs
See latest version of Supplemental Instructions manual 7960-825 for information on exporting alarm logs.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

13 of 69

Exporting 7 Day Logs
See latest version of Supplemental Instructions manual 7960-826 for information on exporting 7 day I/O logs.
Unit Address and Zone
Each unit must have a unique address for the system to operate correctly with the LC supervisory controller (Ex: 1, 2, 3, ...14 depending on the number of units). The unit only needs the address to be changed for the communication to work properly.
When paired with a supervisory controller that uses zones to control groups of wall units, each unit uses the zone setting to relay to the supervisory controller what zone it is set to operate in. Up to three zones can be established with up to 14 units in a single zone. (The LC6000 supervisory controller can control up to a total of 14 units.)
To change the unit address and/or zone:
1. Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Unit Setup A1 screen.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Unit Address (see Figure 15).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the address to a value between 1 and 14.
7. Press ENTER key to scroll to Zone.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value (1, 2 or 3).
9. Press ENTER key to save value.
FIGURE 15 Changing Unit Address or Zone

Temperature Control
Temperature Control Components
Return Air Temperature Sensor
The unit is equipped with a return air temperature sensor to monitor the space temperature when the unit is in orphan mode. The return air sensor is located in the return opening for air path/circuit 1 in such a way that it is exposed to the entering airstream. An alarm signal will be sent to the LC controller if the return air temperature sensor is disconnected. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor.
This sensor can be verified and adjusted by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-1.
6. Verify the measurement displayed on screen is accurate (see Figure 16).
7. If the measurement needs to be adjusted, apply an offset value by pressing ENTER to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the offset.
9. The update will not take effect until the cursor is moved out of the Offset parameter.
10. Once adjusted, press the ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
FIGURE 16 Adjusting Return Air Temperature Sensor

NOTE: Each unit must have a unique address for the communication to work properly. Unit addresses can only be used once per LC6000 regardless of number of zones. Bard also recommends physically labeling each unit for ease in identification.

Return Air Temperature Sensor Alarm
When the return air temperature sensor value is out of range (-41.0 to 303.0°F), the controller will generate a sensor failure alarm to indicate the sensor is not working properly.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.

Manual 2100-749D Page 14 of 69

Temperature Control Operation

The unit utilizes differentials while in orphan mode to control the space temperature. The differential values all reference the setpoint therefore allowing the control band to be easily changed using the setpoint. To change specific staging characteristics, each differential can be modified individually. There are separate setpoints and differentials for cooling and heating. Specific to the cooling differentials, the economizer will always be utilized first on a cooling call unless outdoor conditions are not acceptable for free cooling. In this case, the compressor will be activated at stage 1 in place of the economizer. All remaining stages will be shifted until the economizer becomes available again.

To change or view the unit setpoint:

1. From the Status screen, press UP or DOWN key

until Quick Menu displays Setpoints icon (

Press ENTER key.

2. Press ENTER key to scroll to Cool Setpoint or Heat Setpoint (see Figure 4 on page 9).

3. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value to desired heating and/or cooling setpoint.

Orphan Mode

MEGA-TEC Series wall-mount units have the capability to run without the LC6000 controller attached--this feature is called orphan mode. This keeps the shelter between 60°F and 77°F (factory default settings) by the use of the factory-installed return air sensor in each wall-mount unit. In orphan mode, no auxiliary temperature measurement devices are required for operation. The wall-mount unit automatically uses a continuous blower setting to circulate room air into the return air inlet and uses the return air temperature sensor to control room temperature.

If at any time the wall-mount unit(s) loses communication with the LC6000 controller, the wall-

mount unit(s) will go into orphan mode and operate using the last communicated setpoints.
To change default setpoints, refer to Setpoints on page 7.
During installation, the ability to run in orphan mode allows deactivation of one of the existing, older wallmount units, while keeping the shelter cool with the other unit still operating. Once the first of the Bard wall-mount units is installed and powered on, it will operate in orphan mode--keeping the climate inside the shelter stable and the installers comfortable while the remainder of the older equipment is removed and the remaining Bard wall-mount units and LC6000 controller are installed.
Additionally, should any or all of the MEGA-TEC Series wall-mount units lose communication with the LC6000 controller (such as during maintenance), they will continue to serve the shelter's needs until a repair can be made.
LC6000 Control
When the unit is connected to a LC6000 supervisory controller, the cooling and heating stages will be controlled by the LC6000. For more information on LC6000 staging, see latest version of LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669.
Cooling
Units equipped with an economizer will use one stage of freecooling and up to three stages of mechanical cooling to cool the space. The economizer will always be prioritized first. When an economizer is not installed or the conditions outside are not desirable for cooling, the unit will use up to three stages of mechanical cooling to cool the space. All 400V units use a single capacity compressor for circuit 1, reducing the mechanical cooling stages to two. The units will use the staging differentials in Figure 17 and Figure 18 (page 16) by default. These differentials can be configured on screen Cool Staging B3.

FIGURE 17 Cooling (with Economizer)

Compressor 1 Full Capacity Compressor 2 Compressor 1 Free Cooling

75.0°F 75.5°F 76.0°F 76.5°F 77.0°F 77.5°F 78.0°F 78.5°F 79.0°F 79.5°F 80.0°F 80.5°F 81.0°F

Off

Cooling Deadband

Cooling

Manual 2100-749D

Page

15 of 69

FIGURE 18 Cooling (without Economizer)

Compressor 1 Full Capacity

Compressor 2

Compressor 1

75.0°F 75.5°F 76.0°F 76.5°F 77.0°F 77.5°F 78.0°F 78.5°F 79.0°F 79.5°F 80.0°F 80.5°F 81.0°F

Off

Cooling Deadband

Cooling

FIGURE 19 Heating

Electric Heater 2

Electric Heater 1

58.0°F 58.5°F 59.0°F 59.5°F 60.0°F 60.5°F 61.0°F 61.5°F 62.0°F

Heating

Heating Deadband

Off

To view or adjust the cooling differentials: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
ENGINEER password 9254. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Adv. Sys.
Config; press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Cool Staging
B3 (see Figure 20). 5. Press ENTER key to advance the cursor to the
desired value. 6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change values.
FIGURE 20 Adjusting Cooling Differentials

Heating
The unit will use up to 2 stages of electric heat to heat the space (see Figure 19). Electric heat is available as an option and the heating capacity will determine the number of stages (see Electric Heat Option on page 39).
To view or adjust the heating differentials:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter ENGINEER password 9254.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Adv. Sys. Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Heat Staging B4 (see Figure 21).
5. Press ENTER key to advance the cursor to the desired value.
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change values.

Manual 2100-749D Page 16 of 69

FIGURE 21 Adjusting Heating Differentials

FIGURE 22 Overriding EEV Output

Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
EEV Components
Electronic Expansion Valve
The electronic expansion valve is a stepper motor that is controlled with a step output from the controller. The valve is capable of 480 steps represented by a 0-100% signal on the controller. The motor drives a needle valve that regulates the flow of refrigerant.
EEV Instructions for Vacuum, Reclaim, Charge Unit
The electronic expansion valve moves to the 40% open position when the unit is not actively cooling. The valve may need to be manually positioned for service or troubleshooting. The valve can be positioned by using a menu override. Once the valve is placed into override, the EEV will remain in the Service Position Override for 5 minutes.
To manually override the valve:
1. Turn the unit off using the TEC-EYE. See Unit On/ Off on page 13 for instructions on how to turn unit off using the TEC-EYE.
2. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Manual EEV; press ENTER key.
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to EEV Circuit 1 C6-1 or EEV Circuit 2 C6-2.
7. Press ENTER key to scroll to Service Pos (see Figure 22).
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust to the desired value.
9 Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable.
10. Press UP or DOWN key to change Off to On.
11. Press ENTER key to save.
After the service or troubleshooting is completed, use TEC-EYE to disable the EEV manual positioning override

and turn unit back on. If EEV manual position override is not turned off, once 5 minutes has elapsed from the time the valve was placed into override, the override will expire and the valve will return to normal operation. The valve can also be opened or closed using the EEV service tool (Bard Part # 2151-021). This magnetic EEV service tool (shown in Figure 23) is used to manually open the EEV. To do this, remove the EEV stator coil (red color with retaining nut on top), slide the magnetic tool over the shaft where the stator was removed and turn in a clockwise direction to open the valve to the full open position (directional arrows are provided on the tool). Opening the valve to the full open position will aid in the refrigerant reclamation and evacuation processes. With the stator removed, the resistance should be 40 ohms +/- 10%. There are two sets of three wires that will have this resistance. After removing the EEV service tool, reapply the EEV stator coil and retaining nut. Upon powering the unit back up, the control board will automatically drive the EEV back to the fully shut position, and then back to the 40% open position prior to starting the compressor back up. Once the compressor starts, the control board will again modulate the EEV position to control the system superheat.
FIGURE 23 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) and Service Tool
EEV Stator Coil
EEV
EEV Service Tool

Manual 2100-749D

Page

17 of 69

System Pressures

To view system pressure and temperatures during this process:

1. From the Status screen, press UP or DOWN key

until Quick Menu displays Unit Information icon

(

). Press ENTER key.

2. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to A/C Circuit 1 Info and A/C Circuit 2 Info screens (see Figure 8 on page 10).

Suction Pressure Transducer

The unit has pressure transducers installed on the suction line between the evaporator coil and compressor (one on refrigerant circuit 1 and one on refrigerant circuit 2). The transducer is used for system monitoring of suction system pressures. The transducer is used with the suction temperature sensor to provide a real time superheat calculation that determines the EEV position.

This transducer reading can be verified and adjusted by:

1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.

2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.

3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.

4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.

5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-6 (for circuit 1) or Analog Ins C3-8 (for circuit 2).

6. Verify the measurement displayed on screen is accurate (see Figure 24).

7. If the measurement needs to be adjusted, apply an offset value by pressing ENTER to scroll to Offset.

8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the offset.

9. The update will not take effect until the cursor is moved out of the Offset parameter.

10. Once adjusted, press the ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.

FIGURE 24 Adjusting Suction Sensor/Transducer
Pressure Values

Troubleshooting the Suction Pressure Transducer 0-250 psig -5v Nominal, .5 4.5v Actual 4v/250 psig = .016 volts per 1 psig Example: 125 psig x .016 + .5 volts = 2.5 volts Formula for Tech: Measured Pressure x .016 + Voltage Offset = Expected Transducer Signal Voltage (see Figure 25).
FIGURE 25 Voltage to Pressure: Suction Pressure Transducer
Suction Pressure Alarm When the suction pressure transducer value is measured out of range (0-250 PSIG) and the compressor has been operating for longer than 1 minute (verified by discharge pressure transducer), the controller will generate a sensor failure alarm to indicate the sensor is not working properly. This alarm cannot be adjusted. Suction Temperature Sensor The suction temperature sensor is used to calculate superheat. The EEV uses this value to control the EEV. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor. The suction temperature sensor measurement can be verified and adjusted by: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs;
press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-
10 (for circuit 1) or Analog Ins C3-11 (for circuit 2). 6. Verify the measurement displayed on screen is
accurate (see Figure 26). 7. If the measurement needs to be adjusted, apply an
offset value by pressing ENTER to scroll to Offset.

Manual 2100-749D Page 18 of 69

8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the offset. 9. The update will not take effect until the cursor is
moved out of the Offset parameter.
FIGURE 26 Adjusting Suction Temperature Sensor Values

Suction Temperature Sensor Alarm
When the suction temperature sensor value is out of range (-41.0 to 303.0°F), the controller will generate a sensor failure alarm to indicate the sensor is not working properly.
This alarm cannot be adjusted.
EEV Operation
EEV Superheat Control
The electronic expansion valve (EEV) will open or close to maintain the superheat setpoint while the compressor is running (see Table 5). When the compressor is not running, the valve will close to the 40% open default position.
TABLE 5 Unit Specific Superheat Setpoints

Unit W180B

Superheat 12°F

Low superheat protection will be active once the superheat value is at or below 5°F. At this point, the control will aggressively close the valve so that superheat is maintained.
Additional EEV Alarms
Low Superheat Alarm
This alarm will become active when the calculated superheat goes below 5°F. This alarm will clear itself when the condition is no longer present.
This alarm cannot be adjusted.

Indoor Airflow
Indoor Airflow Components
Blower
The unit is equipped with a blower that is driven by an electronically commutated motor (ECM). The blower is controlled by a 0-100% signal through Modbus communication. The motor controller converts this signal to a PWM signal. The blower uses a 17.7" (450 mm) diameter wheel and operates up to 2300 rpm.
The blower output can be put into an override mode for verification or troubleshooting.
To put the blower into override:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Fans / Blowers; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Blower 1 C5-1 or Blower 2 C5-2.
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Blower Overrides? (see Figure 27).
7. Press UP or DOWN key to change No to Go. The override will begin and the screen will change to the override screen (see Figure 27).
The override will last for 5 minutes or until the Blower Overrides parameter is set to No again.
FIGURE 27 Putting Blower Output into Override Mode

Manual 2100-749D

Page

19 of 69

The blower output can essentially be placed into a permanent override that can only be turned off and/ or reset to factory blower speeds by the user. This override will only allow for the blower speed to be increased above the rated airflow for a given mode of operation. This allows the airflow to be tailored to special situations or airflow needs. Modifying the blower speeds and enabling this override will affect system performance, but by limiting the adjustment to only allow for an increase of the rated airflow speeds, the built-in safeties will not be compromised. The Cust. Blower B7-1 screen (see Figure 28) will display Factory if the blower speeds have not been modified and are in the Factory programmed state. Once any speed has been modified, Custom will be displayed indicating that the factory programmed speeds are not being used. A reset is available to revert all changes back to the Factory speeds, if desired. Any changes made to the blower output will then be reflected in the Info menu accessed from the Main Menu screen when the blower is active or from the Fans / Blowers info screens.
FIGURE 28 Verifying Blower Speeds State
Alarm Speeds B7-6 screen (see Figure 29) will allow for Emergency Vent (emergency vent operation only available if connected to an LC6000) and Freeze speeds to be adjusted down to Cool 2 Nominal airflow speed. If the system were to operate in either of these modes with a ducted system, there could be extremely high static pressure put on the duct system as a result. See Table 9 on page 24 for blower speeds.
FIGURE 29 Adjusting Emergency Vent and Freeze Speeds

To put the blower into Custom Blower mode: 1. Press Menu key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Advanced
System Config; press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Cust. Blower
Setup B7; press ENTER (see Figure 30).
FIGURE 30 Putting Blower into Custom Blower Mode
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to toggle through to the next screens from B7-1 (see Figure 31). If a Factory reset of the blower speeds is desired, press the ENTER key then press UP or DOWN keys to toggle No to Yes at the bottom of the screen; press ENTER.
6. Once screens Cust. Blower B7-2 to Alarm Speeds B7-6 are displayed, any one or all of the speeds listed can be changed from the Factory blower output displayed on the screens. Once any one of the speeds is manipulated, screen Cust. Blower B7-1 will display Custom instead of Factory to indicate a change has been made.

Manual 2100-749D Page 20 of 69

FIGURE 31 Custom Blower Screens

W180B

TABLE 6 Rated Airflow

Nominal Rated CFM

Nominal Rated ESP

High

Low

5400 3280

0.35

TABLE 7 Indoor Blower Performance

ESP

Dry

Wet

(Inch H20) Coil

Coil

W180B

0.35

8190 N/A

TABLE 8 Maximum ESP of Operation
Electric Heat Only

Model
-N0Z -N09 -N18 -N36
-Q0Z -Q09 -Q18 -Q36
-S0Z -S09 -S18 -S36
-T0Z -T09 -T18 -T36

Static Pressure ("WC)*
1.00" 1.00" 1.00" 1.00"
1.00" 1.00" 1.00" 1.00"
1.00" 1.00" 1.00" 1.00"
1.00" 1.00" 1.00" 1.00"

* Unit is rated for free blow non-ducted operation with SG-15W Supply Grille and RG-15W Return Grille.

Blower Status Switch
The unit is equipped with a differential pressure airflow switch to monitor the blower (see Figure 32 on page 22). If the blower is turned on and the switch doesn't open to indicate there is differential pressure between the inlet and outlet of the blower, an alarm will be generated. For switch settings, see Figure 32.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

21 of 69

FIGURE 32 Dirty Filter Switch and Blower Status Switch

Left and Right Dirty Filter Switches
(W180 Set @ 1.40)

Left and Right Blower Status Switches
(W180 Set @ 0.40)

Differential airflow status can be viewed by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Inputs C1-1; press ENTER key.
5. Reference AIrflw 1 row and Val column (see Figure 33).
FIGURE 33 Verifying Differential Airflow Status

Blower Status Alarm
When the blower is on for 45 seconds and no airflow is detected by the airflow switch, the compressor and heating operations will be disabled. The system will wait 5 minutes before trying again. After three consecutive no airflow events, the system will generate an alarm and lockout requiring a user reset.
Filters
The filters can be serviced by opening the "hinged" front access panel and locking it into position. They sit upon a removal tray by pushing or pulling them in place. This also improves access to back filters without having to reach inside the unit. There are six (6) MERV 8 filters (three per coil), each measuring 16" x 25" x 2".
Dirty Filter Switch
These units are equipped with a differential pressure switch to indicate when the filter(s) needs to be replaced (see Figure 32). The dirty filter switch measures the pressure difference across the filter through silicone tubing routed to the blower and evaporator areas of the unit.
The switch circuit consists of a normally closed filter pressure switch. The switch will open when the pressure differential goes above the setting indicated on the dial. When the pressure difference returns below the setting on the dial, the switch will close.
Adjustment of dirty filter switch may be necessary to ensure proper operation. See Figure 34 to aid in setting the filter switch to operate at different percentages of filter blockage.
Filter switch status can be viewed by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Inputs C1-1 (Filter 1) or Digital Inputs C1-2 (Filter 2); press ENTER key.
5. Reference Filter 1 or Filter 2 row and Val column (see Figure 33).
Dirty Filter Alarm
The wall-mount unit is equipped with a differential pressure switch input to the controller. When the switch indicates a dirty filter, the controller will generate an alarm. The alarm will latch once triggered requiring a technician to acknowledge the alarm after replacing filters. Additionally, an indicator light will be turned on with the alarm and turned off when the alarm clears.
The threshold of this alarm is adjusted by changing the settings on the switch (see Figure 34).

Manual 2100-749D Page 22 of 69

ADJUSTMENT INDICATOR ARROW
ADJUSTMENT KNOB

FIGURE 34 Dirty Filter Switch and Filter Indicator Light
FILTER LIGHT

* See Figure 32 for dirty filter switch settings

SCREW TO REMOVE COVER
COVER

TUBE LOCATED IN AIRSTREAM AFTER FILTER

Filter Indicator Light
The wall-mount unit is equipped with a 24V indicator light mounted on side of unit that displays the current status of the filter (see Figure 34). When the light is on, the filter needs to be replaced. Once the filter(s) has been changed and the alarm has been cleared, the indicator light will turn off.
To view the status of the output:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs C2-1.
6. The status is displayed next to Filter Light (see Figure 35).

FIGURE 35 Verifying Filter Light Status
MIS-3952

The filter light output can be put into override to aid in troubleshooting. The override will only stay active for 5 minutes.
To override the filter light output:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs; press ENTER key.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

23 of 69

5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs C2-5.
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override (see Figure 36).
7. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes. 8. Press ENTER key to scroll to Filter Light. 9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to On or Off.
FIGURE 36 Overriding Filter Light Output
Indoor Airflow Operation
Blower Speed Control The blower is capable of changing speeds to best match the requirements of the system depending on which mode the system is in. The unit will automatically adjust its blower speed based on the mode and number of stages active. In addition to the nominal speeds for each cooling stage, the controller has the option to enable high sensible operation or Balanced ClimateTM operation (see Table 9). Freeze Condition Operation A freeze condition will occur when the Saturated Evap temp falls below 28°, triggering an Active Freeze alarm and will then run the blower at the listed Freeze Condition speed for 5 minutes once the alarm has been triggered. High Sensible Operation In high sensible operation, the blower speed will be raised for each stage of cooling to increase the sensible cooling of the equipment. With this option enabled, the higher speeds will be used during compressor operation unless passive or active dehumidification modes are operating. Balanced Climate Operation In Balanced Climate operation, the blower speed will be lowered for each stage of cooling to improve the moisture removal capabilities of the equipment. With this option enabled, the lower speeds will be used during compressor operation when the indoor humidity is above the passive dehumidification setpoint.

NOTE: Blower speeds may revert back to nominal speeds during active dehumidification if electric reheat is used.
TABLE 9 W180 Blower Speed Settings*

Mode

Blower % 230V 460V

Blower Only

Free Cooling

Cooling Stage
1

Balanced Climate Nominal
High Sensible

Cooling Stages 2 and 3

Balanced Climate Nominal
High Sensible

Heating Stage 1

Heating Stage 2

Dehumidification

Emergency Ventilation

Freeze Condition

35.0 35.0 48.0 43.0 20.2 19.3 30.0 26.2 37.0 29.0 34.6 30.5 48.0 43.0 53.0 46.0 48.0 43.0 48.0 43.0 34.6 30.5 100.0 100.0 80.0 80.0

* Blower position percentages are communicated through Modbus and cannot be verified with meter.

To enable or disable either high sensible operation or Balanced Climate operation:
1. Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Blower Config A10 screen.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Balanced Climate or High Sensible parameter (see Figure 37).
6. Press UP or DOWN key to change value from Off to On or On to Off.
The unit will automatically switch to the required speed for each mode. For more information on the high sensible command from LC, please see LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669.

Manual 2100-749D Page 24 of 69

FIGURE 37 Enabling/Disabling High Sensible Operation or
Balanced Climate Operation

FIGURE 38 Enabling Fan Override

Additional Indoor Airflow Alarms
Supply Air Temperature Alarm
When the supply air temperature sensor value is out of range (-41.0 to 303.0°F), the controller will generate a sensor failure alarm to indicate the sensor is not working properly.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Condenser Fan
Condenser Fan Components
Condenser Fan
The unit is equipped with a condenser fan that is driven by an electronically commutated motor (ECM). This fan is controlled by a 0-100% command using Modbus serial communication. The fan operates between 100-1200 rpm.
To enable fan override:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Fans / Blowers; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Condenser Fan 1 C5-3 or Condenser Fan 2 C5-4 (see Figure 38).
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to the Fan Overrides?
7. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value from No to Go. The override will begin and the screen will change to the override screen (see Figure 38).
The override will last for 5 minutes or until the Fan Overrides parameter is set to No again.

Liquid Pressure Sensor
The unit has a pressure transducer installed on the liquid line between the condenser and electronic expansion valve (EEV). The transducer is used for condenser fan speed control and for monitoring of system operation. The liquid line transducer is also referred to as the discharge or liquid pressure sensor.
The discharge/liquid pressure sensor input can be verified and adjusted by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-7 (for circuit 1) or Analog Ins C3-9 (for circuit 2).
6. Verify the measurement displayed on screen is accurate (see Figure 39 on page 26).
7. If the measurement needs to be adjusted, apply an offset value by pressing the ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the offset. The update will not take effect until the cursor is moved out of the offset parameter.
9. Once adjusted, the ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

25 of 69

FIGURE 39 Adjusting Discharge/Liquid Transducer
Pressure Values
Troubleshooting the Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer 0-650 psig .5 to 4.5v 4.5-.5 + 4 volt range/650 psig = .00615 volts per 1 psig Example: 325 psig x .00615 + .5 v = 2.5 volts Formula for Tech: Measured Pressure x .00615 + Voltage Offset = Expected Transducer Signal Voltage (see Figure 40).
FIGURE 40 Voltage to Pressure: Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer

The liquid temperature sensor can be verified and adjusted by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C313 (for circuit 1) or Analog Ins C3-15 (for circuit 2).
6. Reference the Value to verify the temperature (see Figure 41).
7. If an offset needs to be applied, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the offset to desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save.
10. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
FIGURE 41 Adjusting Discharge/Liquid Temperature Input

Voltage Offset
Discharge/Liquid Pressure Transducer Alarm
When the discharge pressure sensor value is out of range (0-650 PSIG), the controller will generate a sensor failure alarm to indicate the sensor is not working properly.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Liquid Temperature Sensor
The unit is equipped with a liquid line temperature sensor to monitor the temperature of the liquid refrigerant leaving the condenser and entering the EEV. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor.

Outdoor Temperature Sensor
The unit is equipped with a combination outdoor temperature and humidity sensor. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor. See page 34 for more information.
Condenser Fan Operation
Condenser Fan Speed Control
The fan will speed up or slow down to attempt to maintain a discharge/liquid pressure setpoint. The discharge/liquid pressure setpoint will vary based on the outdoor ambient conditions (see Figure 42). If the outdoor temperature sensor fails, or is disabled, the discharge/liquid pressure setpoint will be set to a nominal value of 415 psig. Because the control is dependent on the discharge pressure sensor, the controller will alter its operation if the sensor is not

Manual 2100-749D Page 26 of 69

enabled or failed. When the liquid pressure transducer is not enabled or considered failed by the controller, a nominal speed will be used during a compressor call (see Table 10).
FIGURE 42 Condenser Fan Discharge/Liquid Pressure Setpoint

TABLE 10 Condenser Fan Nominal Speed

Unit

Outdoor Temperature

Discharge Pressure Setpoint

Nominal

Discharge/Liquid Condenser

Pressure

Fan

Setpoint

Speed

W180

< 80°F
80°F 95°F
> 95°F

350 psig
350 425 psig
425 psig

425 psig

58%

Compressor
Compressor Components
Compressor
Three Phase Scroll Compressor Start Up Information
Scroll compressors, like several other types of compressors, will only compress in one rotational direction. Direction of rotation is not an issue with single phase compressors since they will always start and run in the proper direction.
However, three phase compressors will rotate in either direction depending upon phasing of the power. Since there is a 50-50 chance of connecting power in such a way as to cause rotation in the reverse direction, verification of proper rotation must be made. Verification of proper rotation direction is made by observing that suction pressure drops and discharge pressure rises when the compressor is energized. Reverse rotation also results in an elevated sound level over that with correct rotation, as well as substantially reduced current draw compared to tabulated values.

Verification of proper rotation must be made at the time the equipment is put into service. If improper rotation is corrected at this time, there will be no negative impact on the durability of the compressor. However, reverse operation for over 1 hour may have a negative impact on the bearing due to oil pump out.
NOTE: If compressor is allowed to run in reverse rotation for an extended period of time, the compressor's internal protector will trip.
All three phase compressors are wired identically internally. As a result, once the correct phasing is determined for a specific system or installation, connecting properly phased power leads to the same Fusite terminal should maintain proper rotation direction.
The direction of rotation of the compressor may be changed by reversing any two line connections to the wall-mount unit.
Compressor Control Module (CCM)
Delay-on-Make Timer Short Cycle Protection/Delay-on-Break Test Mode High Pressure Detection Brownout Protection with Adjustment
The LPC terminals are jumpered in this application. Instead, the low pressure transducer is used for low pressure monitoring.
Each compressor uses an independent CCM.
Delay-on-Make Timer
In the event of power loss, a delay-on-make timer is included to be able to delay startup of the compressor. This is desired when more than one unit is on a structure so that all of the units do not start at the same time which could happen after a power loss or building shutdown. The delay-on-make time period is 2 minutes plus 10% of the delay-on-break time period. To ensure that all of the units do not start at the same time, adjust the delay-on-break timer on each unit to a slightly different delay time.
Short Cycle Protection/Delay-on-Break
An anti-short cycle timer is included to prevent short cycling the compressor. This is adjustable from 30 seconds to 5 minutes via the adjustment knob (see Figure 43 on page 28). Once a compressor call is lost, the time period must expire before a new call will be initiated.
10% of this time is also considered on the delay-onmake timer (see Delay-on-Make Timer).
High Pressure Detection
High pressure switch monitoring allows for a lockout condition in a situation where the switch is open. If the high pressure switch opens, the CCM will de-energize the compressor. If the switch closes, it will then restart the compressor after the delay-on-break setting has expired on the device. If the switch trips again during

Manual 2100-749D

Page

27 of 69

the same Y call, the compressor will be de-energized. The ALR terminal will be energized, signaling the unit control board that a high pressure event has occurred (see Refrigerant High Pressure Alarm).
Test Mode
By rapidly rotating the potentiometer (POT) clockwise (see Figure 43), all timing functions will be removed for testing.
The conditions needed for the unit to enter test mode are as follows: POT must start at a time less than or equal to the 40 second mark. The POT must then be rapidly rotated to a position greater than or equal to the 280 second mark in less than ¼ second. Normal operation will resume after power is reset or after the unit has been in test mode for at least 5 minutes.
Brownout Protection with Adjustment
Brownout protection may be necessary if the utility power or generator power has inadequate power to prevent the voltage from dropping when the compressor starts. This is rare but can happen if the generator is undersized at the site or if the site is in a remote

location far from the main power grid. Under normal circumstances, allowing the brownout to be ignored for a time period should not be needed. The 8201-171 is shipped with all the DIP switches in the 'off' or 'do not ignore' position (see Figure 43).
If ignoring the brownout is needed because of the above conditions, three preset timers can be set by DIP switches in order to delay signaling a power brownout for a specific length of time after compressor contactor is energized. This allows the compressor a time period to start even if the voltage has dropped and allows the voltage to recover. This delay only happens when the CC terminal energizes. The delay can be set to 1 second (A DIP switch), 5 seconds (B DIP switch) or 10 seconds (C DIP switch); time is not cumulative--only the longest setting will apply. If the voltage recovers during the brownout delay period, the compressor will continue running.
If a brownout condition is detected by the 8201-171 at any point while there is a cooling call or power is on at Y, the troubleshooting light will flash blue. The light will continue to flash until the cooling call is

FIGURE 43 8201-171 Compressor Control Module

High Pressure Switch

Compressor Contactor Output

18-30 VAC Input

Alarm Output

Y Input from Thermostat and High Pressure Switch
Troubleshooting Light

Common

8201-171

Delay-on-Break Time Adjustment Potentiometer

Manual 2100-749D Page 28 of 69

Jumper

Brownout Ignore Time DIP Switches*
* Turn on only one switch for that specific ignore time setting. 10 seconds is the maximum brownout ignore time. If all switches are "off", the control is in "do not ignore".

satisfied or power is removed from the Y terminal. This condition does not prevent operation, it only indicates that a brownout condition was present at some point during the call. If a brownout condition is detected while CC has an output, CC will be deenergized and will retry after the delay-on-break timer is satisfied, honoring any DIP switch timer chosen when the CC output is re-energized; this process will continue until call is satisfied.
If inadequate utility or generator power continues after the Delay-on-Make or Delay-on-Break timer is fulfilled, the CC output will not energize. This could lead to the compressor never starting. The control will see the brownout immediately and not start.
A common scenario and one that has been seen in the field is when a unit or units switches from utility power to generator power. With slower transfer switches, the time delay between the utility power and generator power didn't cause a problem. The units lost power, shut off and came back on line normally. With the introduction of almost instantaneous transfer switches, the power glitch may be enough that the compressor will start to run backwards.
High Pressure Safety Switch
All units have a high pressure switch as a safety device. This device will open when pressure in the system reaches 650 PSIG. The switch is directly connected to the dedicated compressor control module (see High Pressure Detection on page 27).
Refrigerant High Pressure Alarm
When the wall-mount unit receives a signal from the compressor control module (CCM) indicating a high pressure event, the wall-mount unit will generate an alarm. Upon receiving the alarm, the wall-mount unit will remove the "Y" call from the CCM, resetting the status of the CCM. The alarm will stay present on the wall-mount unit until manually cleared with TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool.
In addition to the CCM, the discharge pressure transducer is used to prevent a high pressure event. When the discharge pressure is above the discharge pressure alarm setpoint (set 30 pounds below high pressure switch, which is 650), the system will disable stage 2 of mechanical cooling.
Phase Monitor
Used only on three phase equipment, the phase monitor is a compressor protection device that will prohibit operation of the compressor if the device senses a possible reverse-rotation situation due to incorrect phasing. On a call for compressor (and only compressor), the device will check incoming phase, check for severe voltage imbalance and check for proper frequency. Under nominal conditions, a green LED light will show on the face of the monitor. If there is improper phasing, voltage imbalance or frequency deviation, the device will

show a red LED light and prohibit compressor operation.
If a fault condition occurs, reverse two of the supply leads to the unit. Do not reverse any of the unit factory wires as damage may occur.
Crankcase Heater
All units covered in this manual are provided with compressor crankcase heat.
This crankcase heater is a band-type heater located around the bottom of the compressor. This heater is controlled by the crankcase heater relay. The heater is only energized when the compressor is not running.
Crankcase heat is essential to prevent liquid refrigerant from migrating to the compressor, preventing oil pump out on compressor start-up and possible bearing or scroll vane failure due to compressing a liquid.
IMPORTANT: The following procedure must be followed at initial start-up and at any time power has been removed for 12 hours or longer.
To prevent compressor damage which may result from the presence of liquid refrigerant in the compressor crankcase:
1. Make certain the room thermostat is in the "off" position (the compressor is not to operate).
2. Apply power by closing the system disconnect switch. This energizes the compressor heater which evaporates the liquid refrigerant in the crankcase.
3. Allow 4 hours or 60 minutes per pound of refrigerant in the system as noted on the unit rating plate, whichever is greater.
4. After properly elapsed time, the thermostat may be set to operate the compressor.
5. Do not open system disconnect switch except as required for safety while servicing.
Compressor Operation
The compressor will be enabled when the unit (in orphan mode) or LC provide a cooling call. The compressor call from the controller has several delays that may affect the start or stop time of the compressor in regards to the cooling demand. The compressor has a minimum on time of 180 seconds to prevent short cycling the compressor. The compressor also has a minimum off time of 120 seconds to prevent start ups before the pressure in the refrigeration system equalizes. When the second stage is engaged, it also has a minimum run time of 120 seconds to allow the system to stabilize before returning to single stage or shutting down.
These delays can be changed by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Adv System Config; press ENTER key.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

29 of 69

4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Comp. Safety B2; press ENTER key.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Min On Time or Min Off Time (see Figure 44).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value. 7. Press ENTER key to save value and move the
cursor to next parameter or top of screen. 8. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main
Menu screen.
FIGURE 44 Adjusting Compressor Delays
To view the status of the compressor outputs: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs
C2-1. 6. The status is displayed next to Compressor 1,
Comp 1 Full and Compressor 2 (see Figure 45).
FIGURE 45 Verifying Compressor Output Status

The compressor outputs can be put into override to aid in troubleshooting. The override will only stay active for 5 minutes. To override the compressor outputs: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs
C2-3. 6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override (see
Figure 46). 7. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes. 8. Press ENTER key to scroll to selected compressor
output. 9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to On or
Off.
FIGURE 46 Overriding Compressor Outputs
Additional Compressor Alarms
Refrigerant Low Pressure Alarm When the suction pressure transducer indicates a pressure value less than the low pressure alarm setpoint of 40 PSIG and there is an active call for cooling, the controller will disable the compressor (after a 120-second delay). NOTE: The second call will be delayed based on the delay off value mentioned in the compressor section. The controller will try to run the refrigeration system two (2) times within 900 seconds before the alarm will lock the compressor out. This alarm needs to be manually cleared before compressor operation will resume.

Manual 2100-749D Page 30 of 69

Economizer
Economizer Components
Actuator
The actuator rotates up to 90° based on a 2-10V signal sent to it by the controller. This component is what opens and closes the damper blade. The unit is equipped with four dampers powered by four separate actuators. The left intake damper (damper 1) and the right intake damper (damper 3) are each powered by a 44 in-lb actuator. The left exhaust damper (damper 2) and right exhaust damper (damper 4) are powered by a 90 in-lb actuator. All dampers are spring return and will close the damper if power is lost.
To verify the output from the controller to the actuator:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Outputs; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Outputs C4-5.
5. To override the current position, press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override (see Figure 47).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value to the desired output.
7. Press ENTER key to save the value and move cursor to Damper 1 Pos, Damper 2 Pos, Damper 3 Pos. or Damper 4 Pos.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value to the desired position.
9. The damper position will update with the new override value and the damper will travel to that position.
NOTE: This override will last for 5 minutes or until the Enable Override is changed back to No.
FIGURE 47 Damper Override

Dust Sensor
The unit has a dust sensor installed near the outdoor air inlet. The dust sensor checks for excessive particulates in the outdoor air, and will close the economizer if the dust is excessive. The sensor uses a PWM signal converted to 0-5V output to the controller.
To ensure proper performance, cleaning may be required. Vacuuming or blowing the dust off the sensor with forced air is recommended. Avoid inserting any objects into the sensor.
The dust sensor can be verified by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C312.
6. Reference the Value for the current sensor reading (see Figure 48).
7. To apply an offset to the current reading, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the value to the desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save the value and move cursor to next parameter.
NOTE: The sensor can be disabled if required for troubleshooting.
10. With the cursor on the Enable parameter, press UP or DOWN keys to change the value from On to Off.
11. Press ENTER key to save.
FIGURE 48 Dust Sensor

Manual 2100-749D

Page

31 of 69

Dust Sample With the update to the 8301-091 dust sensor and new control board 8612-064, a dust sample is used to engage a small fan in the sensor. This command is automatically engaged by the controller when the economizer is being used. To view the status of the dust sample output: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs
C2-2. 6. The status is displayed next to Dust Sample (see
Figure 49).
FIGURE 49 Verifying Dust Sample Output Status
The dust sample output can be put into override to aid in troubleshooting. The override will only stay active for 5 minutes. To override the dust sample output: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs
C2-7. 6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override (see
Figure 50). 7. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes. 8. Press ENTER key to scroll to Dust Sample output. 9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to On or
Off.
Manual 2100-749D Page 32 of 69

FIGURE 50 Overriding Dust Sample Output
Dust Sensor Failure Alarm When the sensor reads a value that is outside of the acceptable 0 to 100% range, an alarm will be generated indicating the sensor has failed. This alarm is just a notification and will not disable any other features on the controller. This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted. High Dust Limit Alarm When dust content in the air is high and is a risk to prematurely reducing airflow through the filters, the unit will restrict the use of the economizer. The controller has adjustable software setpoints to indicate dust levels are too high and to disable the economizer operation for 5 minutes. Once the conditions are no longer present, the alarm will automatically clear. To adjust the dust sensor alarm setpoint: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
USER password 2000. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to System Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Dust
Configuration A4. 5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Alarm Set (see
Figure 51).
FIGURE 51 Adjusting Dust Sensor Alarm Setpoint

6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.
7. Press ENTER key to save the value.
NOTE: When the temperature outside is measured at or below 0°F, the dust sensor alarm will be disabled to allow economizer operation.
Damper Blade
The system utilizes four damper blades to bring in outdoor air and exhaust space air for economizer operation. Damper 1 is left intake, damper 2 is left exhaust, damper 3 is right intake and damper 4 is right exhaust (see Figure 52). Damper blades are made of sheet metal and are integrated into the equipment.
FIGURE 52 W180 Damper Blades

FIGURE 53 Damper Blade Position

Damper 3 Damper Switch 3
Damper 4 Damper Switch 4

Rear View

Damper 1 Damper Switch 1
Damper 2 Damper Switch 2

To view damper blade position:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Outputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Outputs C4-1 (damper 1), Analog Outputs C4-2 (damper 2), Analog Outputs C4-3 (damper 3) or Analog Outputs C4-4 (damper 4). See Figure 53.

Damper Switch
The economizer utilizes three magnetic switches (one on each damper blade) to determine if the damper is operating correctly. This switch will be closed when the damper is closed and open when the damper is open.
To verify the status of the switch:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

33 of 69

4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Ins C12.
6. Reference the values for Damper 1, Damper 2, Damper 3 and Damper 4 (see Figure 54).
7. The input will display ON when the damper is closed (reflecting closed circuit on damper switch) and will display OFF when the damper is open (reflecting open circuit on damper switch).
FIGURE 54 Damper Switch

3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-4. 6. Reference the Value to see the input of the sensor
(see Figure 55).
7. To apply an offset, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save the value.
FIGURE 55 Outdoor Temperature Sensor

Damper Failed to Open Alarm
When the controller commands the economizer damper actuator to a position other than 0% and the damper switch indicates the damper is not open, after a delay of 20 seconds the controller will generate a damper failed to open alarm. This alarm is just a notification and will not disable any features on the controller.
The alarm must be cleared by a user reset.
Damper Failed to Close Alarm
When the controller commands the economizer damper actuator to the 0% position and the damper switch indicates the damper is not closed, after a delay of 300 seconds the controller will generate a damper failed to close alarm. This alarm is just a notification and will not disable any features on the controller.
The alarm must be cleared by a user reset.
Outdoor Temperature and Humidity Combination Sensor
The unit is equipped with a combination outdoor temperature and humidity sensor to monitor outdoor conditions for the economizer operation. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor. The humidity is measured with a humidity sensor that outputs a 4-20mA signal to the controller.
The outdoor temperature can be verified by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.

The outdoor humidity can be verified by: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs;
press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-5. 6. Reference the Value to see the input of the sensor
(see Figure 56).
FIGURE 56 Outdoor Humidity Sensor

Manual 2100-749D Page 34 of 69

7. To apply an offset, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save the value.
Outdoor Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm
When the sensor reads a value that is outside of the acceptable -41 to 303.0° range, an alarm will be generated indicating the sensor has failed. This alarm condition will disable the economizer.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Outdoor Humidity Sensor Failure Alarm
When the sensor reads a value that is outside of the acceptable 0 to 100% RH range, an alarm will be generated indicating the sensor has failed. This alarm condition will disable the economizer when the mode is set to temperature and humidity or enthalpy.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Mixed Air Temperature Sensor
The unit is equipped with two mixed air temperature sensors to monitor the mixed air temperature of each air path separately. The mixed air is measured where the economizers mix return air and outdoor air. This measurement is used to determine if the economizer is controlling correctly. These sensors are 10k ohm NTC thermistors, located in the blower section.
The mixed air temperature can be verified by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C315 (Mixed Air Temp 1) or C3-16 (Mixed Air Temp 2).
6. Reference the Value to see the input of the sensor (see Figure 57).
7. To apply an offset, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save the value.

FIGURE 57 Mixed Air Temperature Sensors
High Mixed Air Temperature Alarm To keep the economizer from bringing in air that is too warm, an alarm will be generated when the mixed air is 2° above the return air temperature for 300 seconds. This alarm will not be generated if the mixed air temperature sensor has failed. The alarm can only be activated during a free cooling call. The alarm is a user reset and must be cleared by the end user. Low Mixed Air Temperature Alarm To keep the economizer from bringing in air that is too cold, an alarm will be generated when the mixed air temperature is 5°F below the mixed air temperature control setpoint for 300 seconds. If this alarm is active, the economizer will be disabled for the current cooling call. This alarm will reference the mixed air temperature control setpoint to ensure that when the mixed air setpoint changes, the alarm dynamically changes with it. This alarm will not be generated if the mixed air temperature sensor has failed. The alarm can only be activated during a free cooling call and requires a user reset.
Economizer Operation
See Figure 93 on page 67 for ventilation airflow paths. The vent option in the model number determines if the equipment has an economizer. If the value is set to "B", the controller will not use the economizer and the type on Economizer Setup A2 will automatically change to None. The only exception to this is emergency ventilation will always attempt to open the dampers. This would only apply if a unit has an economizer but the controller is configured for no vent (B).

Manual 2100-749D

Page

35 of 69

The economizer has four types of operation. The first mode is "None" where the economizer is never utilized, except for emergency purposes. The second mode is "Dry Bulb" where the outdoor temperature is the only consideration for economizer use on a free cooling call. The third mode is "TempHum" where the outdoor temperature and humidity are considered for economizer use on a free cooling call. The fourth mode is "Enthalpy" where the outdoor temperature, humidity and calculated dew point are considered for economizer operation on a free cooling call. To change the economizer type: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
USER password 2000. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to System Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Economizer
Setup A2; press ENTER key. 5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Type (see Figure 58). 6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the Type desired
value to None, Dry Bulb, TempHum or Enthalpy. 7. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to
the next parameter.
FIGURE 58 Economizer Setup
NOTE: The following parameters are for the temperature consideration for economizer use. Applies to Dry Bulb, TempHum and Enthalpy type.
8. The cursor should now be on the Mixed Air Tamp parameter.
9. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter to the desired value.
10. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to the next parameter.
11. The cursor should now be on Delay parameter. 12. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter
to the desired value.

13. Press ENTER key to save the value and move to the next parameter.
14. The cursor is now on the Min Position parameter.
15. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter to the desired value (see Economizer Operation - Minimum Position for more information).
16. Press ENTER key to save the value.
17. Press the DOWN key to navigate to the Economizer Setup A3 screen.
NOTE: The Economizer Setup A3 screen will not display if economizer mode is set to None. Also, the contents of the screen will change depending on which type is chosen: Dry Bulb (Figure 59), TempHum (Figure 60) or Enthalpy (Figure 61). The following menu shows the Enthalpy content which also contains parameters that would be shown on Dry Bulb (temperature only) and TempHum (temperature and humidity only).
18. Press ENTER key to scroll to OA Temp Set (on Drybulb Control and Temp/Hum Control A3 screens, this parameter will be titled Outdoor Set).
19. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the temperature setpoint to desired value.
20. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to Off Diff.
21. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the outdoor temperature differential for which the economizer is re-enabled.
22. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to OA Hum Set.
23. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the humidity setpoint to desired value.
24. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to On Diff.
25. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the outdoor humidity differential for which the economizer is re-enabled.
26. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to Dew Pt. Set.
27. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the outdoor dew point setpoint for economizer operation to the desired value.
28. Press ENTER key to save the value and scroll to On Diff.
29. Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust the dew point differential for which the economizer is re-enabled.
30. Press ENTER key to save the value.
31. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.

Manual 2100-749D Page 36 of 69

FIGURE 59 Economizer Setup Dry Bulb Control
FIGURE 60 Economizer Setup Temp/Hum Control
FIGURE 61 Economizer Setup Enthalpy Control
See Table 11 for default settings for economizer operation.

When the economizer is activated during a free cooling call only, using any of the previously mentioned modes, a 0-10V analog signal will be sent to the economizer actuator. The actuator will then open and close the damper blades to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F. When the mixed air temperature increases, the damper will open and when the mixed air temperature decreases, the damper will close.
The economizer may be disabled by the LC if the system determines it needs to enter dehumidification mode. More information about the dehumidification sequence can be found in the latest revision of LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669. In addition to dehum mode, the economizer may be disabled for 5 minutes (adjustable) if the dust sensor indicates the outdoor air may cause particulate buildup in the air filters. After the time has expired and on a call for cooling, the economizer will open again to sample the air. The wall-mount unit will either return to normal operation or remain locked out for another 5 minutes.
Economizer Operation Minimum Position
The economizer has an option to set minimum position for the economizer. The minimum position will only be active while the blower is operating. To enable minimum position all the time, continuous blower must be activated for the wall unit in the LC6000. See latest version of LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669 for continuous blower configuration.
To set the minimum position value:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to System Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Economizer Setup A2.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Min Position (see Figure 58).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.

TABLE 11 Economizer Default Settings

Temp Only Temp & Humidity Enthalpy*

Mode

Consideration Temperature
Humidity Dew Point

Economizer Available for Cooling
When the outdoor air temperature is below 70°F When the outdoor humidity is below 80% When the outdoor dew point is below 55°F

Economizer Not Available for Cooling
When the outdoor air temperature is above 75°F When the outdoor humidity is above 80% When the outdoor dew point is above 60°F

* In Enthalpy mode, outdoor temperature, humidity and calculated dew point are all considered for economizer operation.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

37 of 69

Miscellaneous Components
Supply Temperature Sensor
The unit is equipped with two supply air temperature sensors, located in the supply opening of each air path, to monitor the leaving air temperature of the unit. The temperature is measured with a 10k ohm NTC thermistor.
The supply air temperature can be verified by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Analog Ins C3-2 (Supply Air Temp 1) or C3-3 (Supply Air Temp 2).
6. Reference the Value to see the input of the sensor (see Figure 62).
7. To apply an offset, press ENTER key to scroll to Offset.
8. Press UP or DOWN keys to change to the desired value.
9. Press ENTER key to save the value.
FIGURE 62 Supply Air Temperature Sensor

Supply Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm
When the sensor reads a value that is outside of the acceptable -41.0 to 303.0° range, an alarm will be generated indicating the sensor has failed.
This alarm is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Emergency Cooling Mode
If the shelter temperature is above the high temperature alarm setpoint on the LC, the unit will be commanded into emergency cooling mode. In this mode, the unit will operate the economizer regardless of the economizer setup, as long as the outdoor temperature is below the indoor temperature. This will stay active until the LC returns the unit to normal operation.
Emergency Cooling - Orphan Mode
When the unit is not connected to the LC6000 and operating in orphan mode, the unit still has the capability to operate in emergency cooling mode. By default this feature is not enabled.
To enable emergency cooling in orphan mode:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Adv System Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Emer. Cool B6.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Use emergency cool in Orphan mode? (see Figure 63).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value.
FIGURE 63 Emergency Cool Orphan Mode

Manual 2100-749D Page 38 of 69

When this feature is used instead of using the zone sensor, an alarm will be triggered by the high return air temperature alarm.
To adjust the return air temperature settings:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to System Config; press ENTER key.

4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Return Air Alarm A5.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable, Lower Limit or Upper Limit (see Figure 64).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to disable the alarm or change the limit values.
FIGURE 64 Adjusting Return Air Alarm Settings

6. The status is displayed next to Elect. Heat 1 and Elect. Heat 2 (see Figure 65).
FIGURE 65 Verifying Electric Heat Output Status

Emergency Ventilation Mode
If the emergency ventilation input at the LC is active, the system will go into emergency ventilation mode. In emergency ventilation mode, the economizers on the wall units will be commanded to 100%. This mode is only available when connected to the LC.
NOTE: All units will receive the emergency ventilation command. Wall units not equipped with economizers will still engage the blower.
Electric Heat Option
Electric Heat Components
Electric Heating Element
The unit can be optionally equipped with 9kw, 18kw or 36kw of heat: The 9kw option is a single stage heating element, the 18kw option comes equipped with two 9kw heating elements that operate in two stages and the 36kw option comes equipped with two 18kw heating elements that operate in two stages. The heating elements are located downstream of the evaporator coils and can be accessed through the upper control panel door.
To view the status of the electric heat outputs:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs C2-1.

The electric heat outputs can be put into override to aid in troubleshooting. The override will only stay active for 5 minutes.
To override the electric heat outputs:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs C2-4.
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override (see Figure 66).
7. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes.
8. Press ENTER key to scroll to selected electric heat output.
9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to On or Off.
FIGURE 66 Overriding Electric Heat Output

Manual 2100-749D

Page

39 of 69

Thermal Overload
The heater assembly has a thermal overload wired in series with the heating element. This device has a cycling limit. For S voltage models, the limit opens at 190°F and resets at 140°F. For N, Q and T voltage models, the limit opens at 180°F and resets at 130°F. The limit is also equipped with a redundant thermal fuse that will open at 240°F.
Electric Heat Operation
The heat strip will be activated on a call for heat. This call can be generated by the LC or the wall-mount unit operating in orphan mode or stand-alone mode.
Electric Reheat Dehumidification
The MEGA-TEC wall-mount unit can be ordered with optional electric reheat dehumidification. This feature is indicated by the letter "E" in the 6th character of the model number. Electric reheat dehumidification is only available as a factory-installed option that must be ordered with the unit. It cannot be installed in the field on an existing unit.
To verify the dehumidification capability of a unit and/ or disable the dehumidification operation:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to System Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Dehum Config A9 (see Figure 67).
FIGURE 67 Electric Reheat Dehumidification

NOTE: Capability on this menu will show the unit's dehumidification capability based on the model number entered into the wall-mount unit's controller. This parameter will show either Not Available or Electric Reheat.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable.
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value from Yes to No.
An electric reheat capable unit will allow for concurrent operation of compressor and electric heat. This allows the compressor to operate which will remove moisture from the indoor air while the electric heat keeps the space temperature from dropping during this operation.
Electric Reheat Dehumidification Operation
The unit will utilize electric reheat dehumidification when it receives an active dehumidification call from the LC6000 supervisory controller. During the active dehumidification call, the unit status message will show "Active Dehum". An LC6000 equipped with and indoor humidity sensor is required to utilize dehumidification.
On a call for electric reheat dehumidification, the unit return air sensor will control the compressor and heating element operation based on the supervisory control setpoints. If the space temperature, based on the sensor attached to the supervisory control, reaches the cooling or heating setpoint, the dehumidification call is overridden until the cooling or heating call is satisfied. If communication is lost with the supervisory controller during a dehumidification call, the electric reheat function at the unit is lost and the unit will operate in orphan mode.
During a call for electric reheat, the wall unit will energize the compressor and the electric reheat coil will be energized to extend the run time of the cooling cycle, mitigating the cooling done by the compressor. If/when the temperature falls to 2° above heating setpoint, the compressor will be disabled until the temperature is increased 2° below the cooling setpoint and then the compressor will be re-energized (see Figure 68). If/when the temperature reaches 4° below the cooling setpoint, the electric heating elements will be energized. The electric heating elements will be disabled 2° below the cooling setpoint. The system will continue the dehumidification process until either the

FIGURE 68 Dehumidification Control (°F)

Cool Reheat
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Manual 2100-749D Page 40 of 69

heating or cooling setpoint are reached again or the requirement for dehumidification is no longer present.
A call for electric dehumidification is ignored if there is a call for emergency vent, emergency cool or emergency off.
For more information on dehumidification staging, see latest version of LC6000 Service Instructions manual 2100-669.
Unit Disable Option
The wall-mount unit can be disabled by opening a dry set of contacts connected to Input DI1 on the PLC board. This feature can be used in addition to the emergency off feature provided by the LC6000 to ensure that the unit does not operate even when in orphan mode. This feature is disabled by default and must be enabled before the input will affect unit operation. When the input detects open contacts, all unit operation will stop and the dampers will close. This is an automatic reset feature that will resume operation as soon as the unit detects the contacts are closed again.
For applications that require the dampers to close rapidly, the 24VAC power supplied to each actuator should be removed so the actuator spring returns. In normal operation, the dampers can take up to 2 minutes to close from fully open. When the 24VAC power is removed from the actuator, the dampers will close in under 30 seconds using the spring return on the actuator.
Beginning with software version MGS1000.1.3.0, output NO9 can be wired in series with the actuators to utilize the spring return when unit disable or emergency off are active on the controller.
NOTE: Alarm logging and trend logging will not be available if power is removed from the controller and unit offline alarms will be recorded on the LC6000.
The unit disable input can be verified and adjusted by:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Inputs; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Ins C1-1.
6. Reference Disable row and En column (see Figure 69).
7. Press ENTER key to scroll to Disable En value.
8. Press UP or DOWN key to change value.
9. Press ENTER key to scroll to Dir.

10. Press UP or DOWN key to change direction (N/O or N/C), if applicable.
11. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen. FIGURE 69 Unit Disable Option
To verify the status of the damper power output: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key. 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs
C-2-2 (see Figure 70). FIGURE 70
Verifying Damper Power Output Status
If the function of the output needs to be verified, the output can be put into override. To override the output: 1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter
TECHNICIAN password 1313. 3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config;
press ENTER key. 4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital
Outputs; press ENTER key.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

41 of 69

5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Digital Outputs C2-6 (see Figure 71).
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable Override. 7. Press UP or DOWN key to change from No to Yes. 8. Press ENTER key to scroll to Damper Power. 9. Press UP or DOWN key to set to On to power the
actuator or Off to spring return the actuator. NOTE: This override will only last for 5 minutes and
then return to normal operation.
FIGURE 71 Overriding Damper Output

FIGURE 72 Serial/Model Number Configuration

Serial/Model Number Configuration
MEGA-TEC wall-mount units configure some settings based on the model number that is input into the unit. The model and serial number are entered at the factory, and should be retained during a software update. However, after a software update, it is best practice to verify that the model number and serial number are still present and accurate. If the model number and/or serial number is missing or incorrect, they will need to be re-entered.
To update serial/model numbers:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter ENGINEER password 9254.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Adv. Sys. Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Unit Setup B1 (see Figure 72).
5. Press ENTER key to advance the cursor to the digit that needs changed in the serial/model number.
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to change value of the digit.
7. Continue Steps 5 and 6 until the serial/model number(s) are correct and reflect the number on the product label.
For more information on the options and settings available for specific model numbers, see the model number breakdown in Figure 73.
Manual 2100-749D Page 42 of 69

FIGURE 73 MEGA-TEC Wall-Mount Unit Model Nomenclature
W 180 B P S 0Z E P X X X X
MODEL SERIES
NOMINAL TOTAL CAPACITY 180 15 Ton 3 Stage Capacity
REVISION B Revision Level
CONTROL LOGIC AND CLIMATE OPTIONS P Programmable Logic Board
E Electric Reheat Dehumidification (Available w/18 kW only)
VOLTS & PHASE N 400/380-60-3
Q 575-60-3 S 230/208-60-3 , 220/200-50-3
T 460-60-3, 415/380-50-3
kW 0Z O kW with Circuit Breaker 09 9 kW with Circuit Breaker 18 18 kW with Circuit Breaker 36 36 kW with Circuit Breaker
VENT B No Vent E Economizer (DB and WB)
FILTER M MERV11 Disposable
P MERV8 2" Pleated N MERV13 2" Pleated
COLOR X Beige Baked Enamel Finish 1 White Baked Enamel Finish 4 Gray Baked Enamel Finish
S Stainless Steel
OUTLET X Standard
COIL AND UNIT COATING OPTIONS X Standard
1 Coated Evaporator 2 Coated Condenser 3 Coated Evaporator and Condenser
PACKAGING OPTIONS X Steel Skid with Carton
1 Steel Skid with Crate

Manual 2100-749D

Page

43 of 69

REFRIGERANT INFORMATION

These units require R-410A refrigerant and polyol ester oil.
General
1. Use separate service equipment to avoid cross contamination of oil and refrigerants.
2. Use recovery equipment rated for R-410A refrigerant. Recover from both high and low side of system.
3. Use manifold gauges rated for R-410A (800 PSI/250 PSI low).
4. R-410A is a binary blend of HFC-32 and HFC-125.
5. R-410A is nearly azeotropic--similar to R-22 and R-12. Although nearly azeotropic, charge with liquid refrigerant.
6. R-410A operates at 40-70% higher pressure than R-22, and systems designed for R-22 cannot withstand this higher pressure.
7. R-410A has an ozone depletion potential of zero, but must be reclaimed due to its global warming potential.
8. R-410A compressors use polyol ester oil.
9. Polyol ester oil is hygroscopic; it will rapidly absorb moisture and strongly hold this moisture in the oil.
10. A liquid line dryer must be used--even a deep vacuum will not separate moisture from the oil.
11. Limit atmospheric exposure to 15 minutes.
12. If compressor removal is necessary, always plug compressor immediately after removal. Purge with small amount of nitrogen when inserting plugs.
Topping Off System Charge
If a leak has occurred in the system, Bard Manufacturing recommends reclaiming, evacuating (see criteria above) and charging to the nameplate charge. If done correctly, topping off the system charge can be done without problems.
With R-410A, there are no significant changes in the refrigerant composition during multiple leaks and recharges. R-410A refrigerant is close to being an azeotropic blend (it behaves like a pure compound or single component refrigerant). The remaining refrigerant charge in the system may be used after leaks have occurred. "Top-off" the charge by utilizing the pressure charts on the inner control panel cover as a guideline.
Manual 2100-749D Page 44 of 69

REMEMBER: When adding R-410A refrigerant, it must come out of the charging cylinder/tank as a liquid to avoid any fractionation and to insure optimal system performance. Refer to instructions for the cylinder that is being utilized for proper method of liquid extraction.
Safety Practices
1. Never mix R-410A with other refrigerants.
2. Use gloves and safety glasses. Polyol ester oils can be irritating to the skin, and liquid refrigerant will freeze the skin.
3. Never use air and R-410A to leak check; the mixture may become flammable.
4. Do not inhale R-410A--the vapor attacks the nervous system, creating dizziness, loss of coordination and slurred speech. Cardiac irregularities, unconsciousness and ultimately death can result from breathing this concentration.
5. Do not burn R-410A. This decomposition produces hazardous vapors. Evacuate the area if exposed.
6. Use only cylinders rated DOT4BA/4BW 400.
7. Never fill cylinders over 80% of total capacity.
8. Store cylinders in a cool area, out of direct sunlight.
9. Never heat cylinders above 125°F.
10. Never trap liquid R-410A in manifold sets, gauge lines or cylinders. R-410A expands significantly at warmer temperatures. Once a cylinder or line is full of liquid, any further rise in temperature will cause it to burst.
Important Installer Note
For improved start-up performance, wash the indoor coil with a dishwashing detergent.
R410-A Refrigerant Charge
This wall-mount unit was charged at the factory with the quantity of refrigerant listed on the serial plate. AHRI capacity and efficiency ratings were determined by testing with this refrigerant charge quantity.
Table 12 shows nominal pressures for the units. The use of pressure gauges should not be necessary as the measurements are available through the TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic too. Since many installation specific situations can affect the pressure readings, this information should only be used by certified technicians as a guide for evaluating proper system performance. They shall not be used to adjust charge. If charge is in doubt, reclaim, evacuate and recharge the wall-mount unit to the serial plate charge.

Pressure Service Ports
High and low pressure service ports are installed on all wall-mount units so that the system operating pressures can be observed. Pressures are shown in Table 12.
This unit employs high-flow Coremax valves instead of the typical Schrader type valves.

WARNING! Do NOT use a Schrader valve core removal tool with these valves. Use of such a tool could result in eye injuries or refrigerant burns!
To change a Coremax valve without first removing the refrigerant, a special tool is required which can be obtained at www.fastestinc.com/en/SCCA07H. See the replacement parts manual for replacement core part numbers.

TABLE 12 W180 Cooling Pressures (S, T, Q and N Voltage Models)

Cooling Air Temperature Entering Outdoor Coil °F

Model
W180 Stage 31

Return Air Temp (DB/WB) 75°/62°
80°/67°
85°/72°

Pressure 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 131
Low Side 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 138 High Side 315 340 364 388 412 435 459 481 504 526 548 573 Low Side 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 145 146 147 High Side 323 348 374 398 423 447 470 494 517 539 562 588 Low Side 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 150 151 152 High Side 334 361 387 412 437 462 487 511 535 558 581 609

W180 Stage 22

75°/62° 80°/67° 85°/72°

Low Side 138 140 141 142 143 143 143 142 141 140 138 136 High Side 318 342 365 389 412 435 458 480 502 524 545 570 Low Side 148 150 151 152 153 153 153 152 151 150 148 145 High Side 326 350 375 399 423 446 469 492 515 537 559 585 Low Side 153 155 156 157 158 158 158 157 156 155 153 150 High Side 337 363 388 413 438 462 486 509 533 556 579 605

75°/62°

W180 Stage 13

80°/67°

85°/72°
Low side pressure ± 4 PSIG High side pressure ± 10 PSIG

Low Side 129 130 130 131 132 133 135 136 137 138 139 141 High Side 312 341 367 392 415 435 454 470 485 497 508 518 Low Side 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 148 149 151 High Side 320 350 377 402 425 446 465 482 497 510 521 531 Low Side 142 143 144 145 147 148 149 150 152 153 154 156 High Side 332 362 390 416 440 462 482 499 515 528 539 550

1 Stage 3 is circuit 1 fully loaded and circuit 2 on. 2 Stage 2 is circuit 1 unloaded and circuit 2 on. 3 Stage 1 is circuit 1 unloaded and circuit 2 off.
Tables are based upon rated CFM (airflow) across the evaporator coil. If there is any doubt as to correct operating charge being in the system, the charge should be removed and system evacuated and recharged to serial plate charge weight.
NOTE: Pressure table based on high speed condenser fan operation. If condensing pressures appear elevated, check condenser fan wiring. See Condenser Fan Operation on page 26.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

45 of 69

MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING

Standard Maintenance Procedures
! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Disconnect all power supplies before servicing. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.
! CAUTION
Cut hazard. Wear gloves to avoid contact with sharp edges. Failure to do so could result in personal injury.
1. Disable system from LC6000 controller (see latest revision of LC6000 Service Instructions 2100669).
2. Turn off AC breakers at wall-mount units. 3. Check inlet sides of condenser and evaporator coils
for obstructions/debris--clean if necessary using a quality manufactured coil cleaning product specific for the evaporator or condenser coil. · Condenser coil: For inlet-side cleaning, remove
condenser grilles. For outlet-side cleaning, remove condenser fan panel. Unbolt fan from mounting brackets and slide fan outward until lower locking arm drops into position. Pivot fan by lifting fan locking arm. IMPORTANT: Be sure to slide fan completely outward before pivoting. Failure to do so could result in damage to the coil. Follow the coil cleaner manufacturer's directions for necessary safety gear and precautions, as well as for application and use. More than one application may be necessary. Rinse thoroughly.

· Evaporator coil: Open filter access panels and remove filters. Apply specific evaporator cleaner directly to the inlet side of coil, being very careful not to overspray into insulation or surrounding panels and wiring. For outlet-side cleaning, remove supply grille and clean from that direction. Residual cleaner and dissolved debris should drip into the drain pan and leave the unit through the condensate hose. More than one application may be necessary. Rinse thoroughly.
4. Manually spin fan and blower motors to ensure they turn freely. All motors are permanently lubricated, so no oil is necessary.
5. Inspect free cooling damper actuator and linkage.
6. Install new air filters.
7. Inspect the control panel of the system.
· Look for insect or rodent activity and remove any nesting materials.
· Manually push contactor closed, observe for movement--contactor points should have minimal discoloration, no spalling or other signs of arcing. Replace if doubtful.
· Check field and factory wiring for tightness and look for signs of overheating (discoloration of terminals or wire insulation).
8. Ensure that supply and return registers are not obstructed, and more importantly, are not recycling the air to one another. Adjust supply louvers if necessary to direct discharge air away from any direct route to the return grille.
9. Re-assemble wall-mount unit, remembering to fasten fan to mounting brackets. Turn breakers back on.
10. Enable system to LC6000 controller (see latest revision of LC6000 Service Instructions 2100669).
11. Repeat steps for additional wall-mount units.

Manual 2100-749D Page 46 of 69

FIGURE 74 Sensors and Peripheral Devices
12" PRESSTITE TAPE PART #5030-008-1200
ST2 SUCTION TEMP SENSOR PART #910-2076
4" PRESSTITE TAPE PART #5030-008-0400

LOW PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
PART #8406-158
LL2 LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR PART# 910-2077 WRAP WITH 3" PRESSTITE TAPE, PART #5030-008-0300

DUST SENSOR
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )

MAT2 MIXED AIR SENSOR PART #910-2157
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )

BLADE SWITCH
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH PART #8406-142 SECURE AND TORQUE PER SPEC EQ1-112 (2 PLACES)
PANEL SWITCH

LOW PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
PART #8406-158

ST1 SUCTION TEMP SENSOR PART #910-2084

MAT MIXED AIR SENSOR PART #910-2156
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )

HIGH PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PART #8406-157
PANEL SWITCH
SECURE ST2 SENSOR TO LINE WITH HOSE CLAMP PART #7950-021 THEN WRAP WITH 6" PRESSTITE TAPE PART #5030-008-0600

DIRTY FILTER SWITCH

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR PART #910-2056

DUST SENSOR CONTROL BOARD
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )
PANEL SWITCH

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH PART #8406-142
SECURE ST1 SENSOR TO LINE WITH HOSE CLAMP PART #7950-021 THEN WRAP WITH 6" PRESSTITE TAPE PART #5030-008-0600
LLT1 LIQUID TEMP SENSOR PART #910-2148 WRAP WITH 3" PRESSTITE TAPE PART #5030-008-0300
HIGH PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PART #8406-157

PANEL SWITCH

BLADE SWITCH
( ECONOMIZER - ONLY )

Manual 2100-749D

Page

47 of 69

FIGURE 75 Supply and Return Air Sensors
Supply Air Sensors
Return Air Sensor
Manual 2100-749D Page 48 of 69

8301-089 Outdoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor

8301-089 Sensor Connections
This unit utilizes a two-wire 4-10mA signal from the 8301-089 sensor to communicate outdoor humidity and a 10K Type III (AN) thermocouple from the 8301-089 sensor to communicate outdoor temperature. The humidity sensor is connected to the sensor control board via the J13 connector. The thermocouple wires are loose in the sensor housing and require a butt splice connector or wire nut to connect

to the main unit wiring harness. See Figures 76 and 77 for sensor wiring and terminal location.
Tables 13 and 14 on pages 51 and 53 are correlation charts for troubleshooting the sensor with a test meter:
Table 13: Temperature to Thermocouple Resistance Table 14: Relative Humidity to Humidity Sensor
Current Output

FIGURE 76 8301-089 Sensor Electrical Connections and DIP Switches

8301-089 temperature/humidity sensor located on upper right side of unit. Remove cover by turning counter clockwise. Be sure to replace cover after accessing.
FIGURE 77 8301-089 Sensor Terminal Connections

Manual 2100-749D

Page

49 of 69

8301-089 Outdoor Temperature Sensor Troubleshooting
To verify sensor operation:
1. Remove lid from outdoor temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Remove wire nuts from green and white wires (see Figure 77).
3. Use a temperature probe (preferred method) or local weather data to find ambient temperature conditions.

4. Using an ohmmeter or resistance mode on a multimeter, measure resistance across white leads leading to the temperature sensor (see Figure 78).
5. Cross reference readings with Table 13.
A. If readings are consistent with reference temperature, check wiring or offset in PLC if outdoor temp value on PLC does not match.
B. If readings do not match, replace sensor.

FIGURE 78 8301-089 Sensor: Temperature Probe Troubleshooting

Manual 2100-749D Page 50 of 69

TABLE 13 8301-089 Sensor: Temperature/Resistance

Temperature Resistance

-25 -31.7 148,452.94

-24 -31.1 143,910.37

-23 -30.6 139,521.46

-22 -30.0 135,280.55

-21 -29.4 131,182.22

-20 -28.9 127,221.25

-19 -28.3 123,392.63

-18 -27.8 119,691.54

-17 -27.2 116,113.37

-16 -26.7 112,653.66

-15 -26.1 109,308.15

-14 -25.6 106,072.72

-13 -25.0 102,943.44

-12 -24.4 99,916.50

-11 -23.9 96,988.26

-10 -23.3 94,155.21

-9 -22.8 91,413.97

-8 -22.2 88,761.30

-7 -21.7 86,194.07

-6 -21.1 83,709.29

-5 -20.6 81,304.06

-4 -20.0 78,975.60

-3 -19.4 76,721.24

-2 -18.9 74,538.41

-1 -18.3 72,424.61

0 -17.8 70,377.48

1 -17.2 68,394.70

2 -16.7 66,474.07

3 -16.1 64,613.46

4 -15.6 62,810.82

5 -15.0 61,064.17

6 -14.4 59,371.62

7 -13.9 57,731.32

8 -13.3 56,141.52

9 -12.8 54,600.50

10 -12.2 53,106.64

11 -11.7 51,658.35

12 -11.1 50,254.11

Temperature Resistance

13 -10.6 48,892.46

14 -10.0 47,571.97

15 -9.4 46,291.29

16 -8.9 45,049.09

17 -8.3 43,844.12

18 -7.8 42,675.14

19 -7.2 41,540.99

20 -6.7 40,440.51

21 -6.1 39,372.62

22 -5.6 38,336.26

23 -5.0 37,330.40

24 -4.4 36,354.06

25 -3.9 35,406.29

26 -3.3 34,486.17

27 -2.8 33,592.81

28 -2.2 32,725.36

29 -1.7 31,883.00

30 -1.1 31,064.92

31 -0.6 30,270.36

32 0.0 29,498.58

33 0.6 28,748.85

34 1.1 28,020.48

35 1.7 27,312.81

36 2.2 26,625.18

37 2.8 25,956.98

38 3.3 25,307.60

39 3.9 24,676.45

40 4.4 24,062.97

41 5.0 23,466.62

42 5.6 22,886.87

43 6.1 22,323.22

44 6.7 21,775.16

45 7.2 21,242.23

46 7.8 20,723.96

47 8.3 20,219.91

48 8.9 19,729.65

49 9.4 19,252.76

50 10.0 18,788.84

Temperature

51 10.6

52 11.1

53 11.7

54 12.2

55 12.8

56 13.3

57 13.9

58 14.4

59 15.0

60 15.6

61 16.1

62 16.7

63 17.2

64 17.8

65 18.3

66 18.9

67 19.4

68 20.0

69 20.6

70 21.1

71 21.7

72 22.2

73 22.8

74 23.3

75 23.9

76 24.4

77 25.0

78 25.6

79 26.1

80 26.7

81 27.2

82 27.8

83 28.3

84 28.9

85 29.4

86 30.0

87 30.6

88 31.1

Resistance
18,337.51 17,898.38 17,471.09 17,055.30 16,650.65 16,256.82 15,873.48 15,500.34 15,137.09 14,783.44 14,439.11 14,103.83 13,777.34 13,459.38 13,149.70 12,848.07 12,554.26 12,268.04 11,989.19 11,717.51 11,452.79 11,194.83 10,943.45 10698.45 10,459.65 10,226.90 10,000.00 9778.81 9563.15 9352.89 9147.86 8947.93 8752.95 8562.79 8377.31 8196.39 8019.91 7847.74

Temperature

89 31.7

90 32.2

91 32.8

92 33.3

93 33.9

94 34.4

95 35.0

96 35.6

97 36.1

98 36.7

99 37.2

100 37.8

101 38.3

102 38.9

103 39.4

104 40.0

105 40.6

106 41.1

107 41.7

108 42.2

109 42.8

110 43.3

111 43.9

112 44.4

113 45.0

114 45.6

115 46.1

116 46.7

117 47.2

118 47.8

119 48.3

120 48.9

121 49.4

122 50.0

123 50.6

124 51.1

125 51.7

Resistance
7679.76 7515.86 7355.94 7199.88 7047.59 6898.95 6753.88 6612.28 6474.05 6339.11 6207.37 6078.74 5953.15 5830.51 5710.75 5593.78 5479.55 5367.98 5258.99 5152.53 5048.52 4946.91 4847.63 4750.62 4655.83 4563.20 4472.67 4384.19 4297.71 4213.18 4130.55 4049.77 3970.79 3893.58 3818.08 3744.26 3672.07

Manual 2100-749D

Page

51 of 69

8301-089 Humidity Sensor Test Value Outputs
This sensor has the ability to output fixed test signals when testing/troubleshooting sensor operation. These settings are to be used for sensor testing/ troubleshooting only and need to be removed before unit can resume normal operation. These settings allow the sensor board to output 0% RH, 50% RH and 100% RH. When these settings are active, the actual humidity sensor is ignored. DIP switches 1, 2 and 3 are used to override the output to a test signal. See Figure 79 for DIP switch/output configuration.
NOTE: If any DIP switches are disrupted, they will need to be returned to the off state in order for the humidity sensor to return to normal operation.

FIGURE 79 8301-089 DIP Switch/Output Configuration

8301-089 Outdoor Humidity Sensor Troubleshooting
To verify sensor operation:
1. Remove lid from outdoor temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Loosen and remove black wire from the 4-20 mA input of TB1 (see Figure 77).
3. Use an RH meter (preferred method) or local weather data to find accurate RH reading.

4. Using an ohmmeter or amperage mode on a multimeter, measure the amperage through the black 4-20 mA wire leading to the PLC (see Figure 80).
5. Cross reference readings with Table 14.
A. If readings are consistent with reference humidity, verify the DIP switches are all in the off position, check wiring or offset in PLC if outdoor humidity value on PLC does not match.
B. If readings do not match, replace sensor.

FIGURE 80 8301-089 Sensor: Humidity Probe Troubleshooting

Manual 2100-749D Page 52 of 69

RH%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

mA Output
4.000 mA 4.160 mA 4.320 mA 4.480 mA 4.640 mA 4.800 mA 4.960 mA 5.120 mA 5.280 mA 5.440 mA 5.600 mA 5.760 mA 5.920 mA 6.080 mA 6.240 mA 6.400 mA 6.560 mA 6.720 mA 6.880 mA 7.040 mA 7.200 mA 7.360 mA 7.520 mA 7.680 mA 7.840 mA 8.000 mA 8.160 mA 8.320 mA 8.480 mA 8.640 mA 8.800 mA 8.960 mA 9.120 mA 9.280 mA

TABLE 14 8301-089 Sensor: Humidity/mA

RH%
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

mA Output
9.440 mA 9.600 mA 9.760 mA 9.920 mA 10.080 mA 10.240 mA 10.400 mA 10.560 mA 10.720 mA 10.880 mA 11.040 mA 11.200 mA 11.360 mA 11.520 mA 11.680 mA 11.840 mA 12.000 mA 12.160 mA 12.320 mA 12.480 mA 12.640 mA 12.800 mA 12.960 mA 13.120 mA 13.280 mA 13.440 mA 13.600 mA 13.760 mA 13.920 mA 14.080 mA 14.240 mA 14.400 mA 14.560 mA 14.720 mA

RH%
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

mA Output
14.880 mA 15.040 mA 15.200 mA 15.360 mA 15.520 mA 15.680 mA 15.840 mA 16.000 mA 16.160 mA 16.320 mA 16.480 mA 16.640 mA 16.800 mA 16.960 mA 17.120 mA 17.280 mA 17.440 mA 17.600 mA 17.760 mA 17.920 mA 18.080 mA 18.240 mA 18.400 mA 18.560 mA 18.720 mA 18.880 mA 19.040 mA 19.200 mA 19.360 mA 19.520 mA 19.680 mA 19.840 mA 20.000 mA

Manual 2100-749D

Page

53 of 69

8620-296 Supply Air Sensor/Return Air Sensor/Mixed Air Sensor/ Suction Sensor/Liquid Sensor

TABLE 15 8620-296 Sensor: Temperature/Resistance Curve J

Temperature ºF
-25.0 -24.0 -23.0 -22.0 -21.0 -20.0 -19.0 -18.0 -17.0 -16.0 -15.0 -14.0 -13.0 -12.0 -11.0 -10.0 -9.0 -8.0 -7.0 -6.0 -5.0 -4.0 -3.0 -2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0

Resistance
196871 190099 183585 177318 171289 165487 159904 154529 149355 144374 139576 134956 130506 126219 122089 118108 114272 110575 107010 103574 100260 97064 93981 91008 88139 85371 82699 80121 77632 75230 72910 70670 68507 66418 64399 62449 60565 58745

Temperature ºF
13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0 33.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 37.0 38.0 39.0 40.0 41.0 42.0 43.0 44.0 45.0 46.0 47.0 48.0 49.0 50.0

Resistance
56985 55284 53640 52051 50514 49028 47590 46200 44855 43554 42295 41077 39898 38757 37652 36583 35548 34545 33574 32634 31723 30840 29986 29157 28355 27577 26823 26092 25383 24696 24030 23384 22758 22150 21561 20989 20435 19896

Temperature ºF
53.0 52.0 53.0 54.0 55.0 56.0 57.0 58.0 59.0 60.0 61.0 62.0 63.0 64.0 65.0 66.0 67.0 68.0 69.0 70.0 71.0 72.0 73.0 74.0 75.0 76.0 77.0 78.0 79.0 80.0 81.0 82.0 83.0 84.0 85.0 86.0 87.0 88.0

Resistance
19374 18867 18375 17989 17434 16984 16547 16122 15710 15310 14921 14544 14177 13820 13474 13137 12810 12492 12183 11883 11591 11307 11031 10762 10501 10247 10000 9760 9526 9299 9077 8862 8653 8449 8250 8057 7869 7686

Temperature ºF
89.0 90.0 91.0 92.0 93.0 94.0 95.0 96.0 97.0 98.0 99.0 100.0 101.0 102.0 103.0 104.0 105.0 106.0 107.0 108.0 109.0 110.0 111.0 112.0 113.0 114.0 115.0 116.0 117.0 118.0 119.0 120.0 121.0 122.0 123.0 124.0

Resistance
7507 7334 7165 7000 6840 6683 6531 6383 6239 6098 5961 5827 5697 5570 5446 5326 5208 5094 4982 4873 4767 4663 4562 4464 4367 4274 4182 4093 4006 3921 3838 3757 3678 3601 3526 3452

Manual 2100-749D Page 54 of 69

8301-057 Blower Status Switch/Dirty Filter Switch
FIGURE 81 8301-057 Air Differential Switch

Terminals
1 - Normally Closed 2 - Normally Open 3 - Common
NOTE: Contact position is in resting state.

W180 Switch Settings

Left and Right Blower Status Switches

0.40

Left and Right Dirty Filter Switches

1.40

P2
P1 Connect hose to P2
Hoses need to be connected to the P2 port (port closest to front)

Manual 2100-749D

Page

55 of 69

Compressor Solenoid

A nominal 24-volt direct current coil activates the internal compressor solenoid. The input control circuit voltage must be 18 to 28 VAC. The coil power requirement is 20 VAC. The external electrical connection is made with a molded plug assembly. This plug contains a full wave rectifier to supply direct current to the unloader coil.
Compressor Solenoid Test Procedures
If it is suspected that the unloader is not working, the following methods may be used to verify operation.
1. Operate the system and measure compressor amperage. Cycle the compressor solenoid on and off at 10-second intervals. The compressor amperage should go up or down at least 25%.
2. If Step 1 does not give the expected results, shut unit off. Apply 18 to 28 VAC to the solenoid molded plug leads and listen for a click as the solenoid pulls in. Remove power and listen for another click as the solenoid returns to its original position.
3. If clicks can't be heard, shut off power, remove the control circuit molded plug from the compressor and measure the solenoid coil resistance (see Table 16).

TABLE 16 Solenoid Coil Resistance

Compressor Model

Solenoid Ohms

ZPS***K5
ZPS***K6 ZPS***K7

350 or 1640 1640

4. Next, check the molded plug.
Voltage Check: Apply control voltage to the plug wires (18 to 28 VAC). The measured DC voltage at the female connectors in the plug should be around 15 to 27 VDC.
Resistance Check: Measure the resistance from the end of one molded plug lead to either of the two female connectors in the plug. One of the connectors should read close to 0 ohms, while the other should read infinity. Repeat with other wire. The same female connector as before should read zero, while the other connector again reads infinity. Reverse polarity on the ohmmeter leads and repeat. The female connector that read infinity previously should now read close to 0 ohms.
Replace plug if either of these test methods does not show the desired results.

Manual 2100-749D Page 56 of 69

FIGURE 82 Compressor Solenoid Location
Solenoid

8612-064 Dust (Particulate) Sensor Control Board
8612-064 Control Board Output Signal Not Responsive 1. With a voltmeter, verify 24VAC present across
24VAC pin terminals. A. If 24VAC is not present, trace back wires to
source. 2. Inspect and re-seat the dust sensor communication
cable. A. Carefully remove the dust sensor
communication cable from the dust sensor connector on the dust sensor alarm board and the dust sensor (see Figure 83). B. Inspect communication cable for the following: i. Wires pulled out of the connectors. ii. Scars in insulation exposing bare wire. C. If communication cable is damaged: i. Replace communication cable. D. If communication cable is not damaged: i. Carefully reconnect the dust sensor
communication cable to the dust sensor connector on the dust sensor alarm board and the dust sensor.
FIGURE 83 8612-064 Dust Sensor Alarm Board

Manual 2100-749D

Page

57 of 69

8301-091 Dust (Particulate) Sensor
The following measurements are taken across V+ and GND on Dust Sensor Alarm

Dust
µg/m3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Signal
Vdc
0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.39 0.44 0.49 0.54 0.59 0.64 0.69 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.88 0.93 0.98 1.03 1.08 1.13 1.18 1.23 1.28 1.33 1.37 1.42 1.47 1.52 1.57 1.62 1.67 1.72

TABLE 17 8301-091 Sensor: Dust/Volts

Dust
µg/m3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

Signal
Vdc
1.77 1.82 1.86 1.91 1.96 2.01 2.06 2.11 2.16 2.21 2.26 2.31 2.35 2.40 2.45 2.50 2.55 2.60 2.65 2.70 2.75 2.80 2.84 2.89 2.94 2.99 3.04 3.09 3.14 3.19 3.24 3.29 3.33 3.38

Dust
µg/m3
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Signal
Vdc
3.43 3.48 3.53 3.58 3.63 3.68 3.73 3.78 3.82 3.87 3.92 3.97 4.02 4.07 4.12 4.17 4.22 4.27 4.31 4.36 4.41 4.46 4.51 4.56 4.61 4.66 4.71 4.76 4.80 4.85 4.90 4.95 5.00

Manual 2100-749D Page 58 of 69

Variable Speed Blower/Condenser Fan
! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Live terminals and connections even when device is turned off. Wait 5 minutes after power has been removed from unit before disconnecting the voltage to the blower/fan motor as internal buss voltage may still be present. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.
Maintenance CAUTION: If control voltage or a stored speed value are
still applied during power reset, motor may start automatically. · Keep out of device danger zones. · When working on/around the fan/blower, switch off line voltage to the unit, ensuring that it cannot be switched back on inadvertently, and wait 5 minutes before removing terminal covers. · Wait until fan/blower comes to a complete stop before entering areas. · After work is performed, verify all tools have been removed from unit and specifically the rotational area of the fan/blower.

FIGURE 84 Fan Terminals

Gen3 Motor Terminal Box

Connector
CON1 CON1 CON1 Housing CON2 CON2 CON2 Housing

Terminal
L1 L2 L3 PE RSA RSB GND LED

Description
Line Power Phase 1 Line Power Phase 2 Line Power Phase 3 Line Power Ground Terminal
Modbus + Modbus Control Ground Terminal Motor Status LED

Gen2 Motor Terminal Box
KL3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Aout Ain 2I +20V Ain 2U GND DIN 3 DIN 2

KL2

KL1

L3 L2 L1

NC COM NO

DIN1 Ain 1I +10V Ain 1U GND RSB RSA

1234567

123

Manual 2100-749D

Page

59 of 69

TABLE 18 Blower/Condenser Fan Troubleshooting

Issue

Possible Cause

Possible Remedy

Impeller/fan not running smoothly

Imbalance in rotating parts

Clean the device (make sure weight clips are not removed during cleaning); replace if imbalance persists after cleaning.

Motor not turning

Mechanical blockage

Switch off unit, isolate from power supply and remove blockage.

Line voltage faulty
Faulty connection

Check line voltage, restore power supply. WARNING: Line Voltage error resets automatically and motor will start without warning.
Switch off, isolate from power supply and correct connection. See connection table on page 59.

Broken motor winding Replace motor.

Inadequate cooling Allow motor to cool down, clean or improve cooling.

High ambient temperature

Allow motor to cool down.

Impermissible operating point (e.g., back pressure
too high)

Correct static issue, allow motor to cool down.

LED Warning/Status Codes
The LED shows the blower/fan motor status with various colors and flash codes and is visible through a small window on the terminal cover of the blower/fan assembly.
Green: No warning of fault.

Orange: Warning. Device is operating out of range but no user action is required.
Red (flashing): There is at least one fault. Flash codes are displayed as on/off pulse at 2Hz. Each code is followed by a 3-second pause. Multiple flash codes will be displayed in succession.

TABLE 19 Blower/Condenser Fan Motor Flash Codes

# of Pulses

Motor Status

Manual Reset Required

Possible Cause

Possible Remedy

Phase Failure/Line Under Voltage

Inverter Output Overheating

Missing phase/poor line voltage quality

Check line voltage.

Yes

Dirty electronics housing

Clean inverter housing/improve cooling.

4 Communication Error

External power supplied

to V out for setting Remove power to unit. Wait. Switch power back on.

parameters (internal error)

Motor Overheating

Yes

Hall Sensor Fault

Yes

Internal error

Remove power to unit. Wait. Switch power back on.

Motor Locked

Mechanical blockage

Remove power. Verify rotor is free to turn. Re-apply power and verify operation.

9 Speed Limit Exceeded

Rotor Position Sensor Calibration Error

Rotor position sensor needs calibration

Replace and return to manufacturer.

13 DC-Link Under Voltage

Line voltage incorrect Check applied line voltage to motor.

Manual 2100-749D Page 60 of 69

Modbus Troubleshooting
Use the following instructions if alarm 96, 97, 99, 101 or 103 occurs (see Alarm Index on page 64).
If communication to a specific device is lost, first verify that the polarity of the wires are correct and wires are securely connected to the specified terminal.
· For controller (PLC board) and controller expansion (c.pCOe): The clear/white wire should land on the positive terminal and the black wire should land on the negative terminal (see Figures 85 and 86).
FIGURE 85 PLC Communication Wires

· For the blower(s) and condenser fan(s): The clear/ white wire should land on the RSA terminal and the black wire should land on the RSB terminal (See Figure 87). Motor generation is displayed on fan/blower screens (see Figures 91 and 92).
FIGURE 87 Blower/Condenser Fan Communication Wires
Gen2 230V Fan

Gen3 460V Fan

FIGURE 86 Expansion Module (c.pCOe) Communication Wires

NOTE: Blower terminals are not accessible while installed in unit. To verify polarity and communication, see Blower Communication Failure on page 62.
· Table 20 shows where the communication wire for each Modbus device lands on the terminal block. Terminals 21-26 should only have clear/white wires landed on them and terminals 27-32 should only have black wires landed on them (see Figure 88).

TABLE 20 Modbus Device Communication Wires

Control Panel Terminal
21 27 22 28 23 29 24 30 25 31 26 32

Modbus Device Terminal
FB + FB J6 Tx/Rx + J6 Tx/Rx RSA RSB RSA RSB RSA RSB RSA RSB

Modbus Device Main Controller
(PLC) Controller Expansion
(c.pCOe) Fan 2
Blower 2
Fan 1
Blower 1

NOTE: Shield cables should only be landed at the Modbus device in a specific shield terminal or ground terminal.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

61 of 69

FIGURE 88 Communication Wires in Terminal Block

2. Verify the correct DIP switch settings on the c.pCOe (see Figure 90).
FIGURE 90 Correct DIP Switch Settings

Verify the terminal block jumpers are placed correctly as shown above. Terminals 21-26 should all be bonded together and terminals 27-32 should all be bonded together.
If problem still persists after verifying correct wiring and polarity, proceed to the next steps.
NOTE: The following steps are only for single communication alarms at specific devices. If there are multiple devices with communication failures, the issue is either that polarity of the wiring is incorrect, the jumpers in the terminal block are incorrect or the communication port on the PLC board is damaged.
c.pCOe Communication Failure
1. Locate the addressing DIP switches on the c.pCOe (see Figure 89).
FIGURE 89 DIP Switch Location

3. If problem persists, verify 24VAC power to c.pCOe, disconnect communication plug from c.pCOe and disconnect wires from terminal block. Verify continuity from end to end and then verify there are no shorts to ground.
4. To verify the expansion module (C.PCOe) is faulty, the communication wires should be isolated from the blower and condenser fan and only connected to the PLC to establish if communication is possible.
c.pCOe Tx+/Rx+ wired to PLC FB+ c.pCOe Tx/Rx wired to PLC FB
5. If problem persists after the previous steps, replace c.pCOe.
Blower Communication Failure
For the following steps, use the TEC-EYE to view the Modbus status of the blower. This screen is accessible in the I/O Menu under Fans/Blowers (see Figure 91).
FIGURE 91 TEC-EYE Blower 1 Screen

Manual 2100-749D Page 62 of 69

1. Due to the inability to open the blower motor terminal access panel while in the unit, swap the polarity of the communication wires for the effected blower.
Blower 1: Terminals 26 and 32 Blower 2: Terminals 24 and 30

2. If the blower remains offline, the blower must be removed for wiring verification and/or replacement. A. Remove blower terminal access cover. B. Verify high voltage to blower on terminals L1, L2 and L3 with a volt meter. C. If incorrect or no voltage to blower, fix the wiring issue and verify communication.
3. If high voltage is present and correct, check communication wires for short, open or grounded circuits. If a wiring problem is found, make corrections, re-install and verify communication.
4. If no problems are found, replace blower motor. Condenser Fan Communication Failure For the following steps, use the TEC-EYE to view the Modbus status of the condenser fan. This screen is accessible in the I/O Menu under Fans/Blowers (see Figure 92).
FIGURE 92 TEC-EYE Condenser Fan 1 Screen
1. Remove condenser fan terminal access cover (if not already done).
2. Verify high voltage to condenser fan on terminals L1, L2 and L3 with a volt meter. A. If incorrect or no voltage to condenser fan, fix the wiring issue and verify communication.
3. If high voltage is present and correct, check communication wires for short, open or grounded circuits. If a wiring problem is found, make corrections, re-install and verify communication.
4. If no problems are found, replace condenser fan.

Manual 2100-749D

Page

63 of 69

Alarm Index

Index

Alarm

0 Error in the number of retain memory writings

1 Error in retain memory writings 2 Circuit 1 Return Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 3 Circuit 1 High Return Air Temperature Alarm 4 Circuit 2 Return Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 5 Circuit 2 High Return Air Temperature Alarm 6 Circuit 1 Mixed Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 7 Circuit 1 Mixed Air High Temperature 8 Circuit 1 Mixed Air Low Temperature 9 Circuit 2 Mixed Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 10 Circuit 2 Mixed Air High Temperature 11 Circuit 2 Mixed Air Low Temperature 12 Circuit 1 Supply Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 13 Circuit 1 High Supply Air Temperature Alarm 14 Circuit 1 Low Supply Air Temperature Alarm 15 Circuit 2 Supply Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 16 Circuit 2 High Supply Air Temperature Alarm 17 Circuit 2 Low Supply Air Temperature Alarm 18 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Alarm 19 Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor Alarm 20 Circuit 1 Dust Sensor Alarm 21 Circuit 1 Dust Sensor High Dust Detection Alarm 22 Circuit 2 Dust Sensor Alarm 23 Circuit 2 Dust Sensor High Dust Detection Alarm 24 Circuit 1 Liquid Line Temp Sensor Alarm 25 Circuit 2 Liquid Line Temp Sensor Alarm

26 Circuit 1 Liquid Line Pressure Sensor Alarm 27 Circuit 2 Liquid Line Pressure Sensor Alarm 28 Circuit 1 Discharge Temp Sensor Alarm 29 Circuit 2 Discharge Temp Sensor Alarm 30 Circuit 1 Discharge Pressure Sensor Alarm 31 Circuit 2 Discharge Pressure Sensor Alarm 32 Circuit 1 Suction Temperature Sensor Alarm 33 Circuit 2 Suction Temperature Sensor Alarm

Reference (to Manual Section Unless Otherwise Noted) Call Bard Technical Service Call Bard Technical Service See Temperature Control section See Temperature Control section See Temperature Control section See Temperature Control section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Condenser Fan section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section

Manual 2100-749D Page 64 of 69

Index

Description

34 Circuit 1 Suction Pressure Sensor Alarm 35 Circuit 2 Suction Pressure Sensor Alarm 36 Circuit 1 Low Pressure 37 Circuit 2 Low Pressure 38 Circuit 1 High Pressure 39 Circuit 2 High Pressure 40 Damper 1 Failed to Open 41 Damper 1 Failed to Close

42 Damper 2 Failed to Close 43 Damper 2 Failed to Open 44 Damper 3 Failed to Open 45 Damper 3 Failed to Close 46 Damper 4 Failed to Open 47 Damper 4 Failed to Close 50 Circuit 1 Freeze Condition 51 Circuit 2 Freeze Condition 52 Circuit 1 Blower Fail Alarm 53 Circuit 2 Blower Fail Alarm 54 Dirty Filter 1 Alarm 55 Dirty Filter 2 Alarm 60 Emergency Ventilation Mode Active 61 Emergency Cooling Mode Active

62 Extreme High Return Temp Alarm (Heat Cutout) 63 Unit Disable 64 Circuit 1 Power Loss Detected 65 Circuit 2 Power Loss Detected 66 Circuit 1 Low SuperHeat 67 Circuit 1 Low Evaporation Pressure 68 Circuit 1 High Evaporation Pressure 69 Circuit 1 High Condenser Temperature 70 Circuit 1 Low Suction Pressure 71 Circuit 1 EEV Motor Error 72 Circuit 1 Self Tuning Error

73 Circuit 1 Emergency Close

Reference (to Manual Section Unless Otherwise Noted) See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Compressor section See Compressor section See Compressor section See Compressor section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Economizer section See Indoor Airflow Operation See Indoor Airflow Operation See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Indoor Airflow section See Economizer section See Economizer section
See Unit Disable Option section
See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section
Continued on page 66

Manual 2100-749D

Page

65 of 69

Index

Description

74 Circuit 1 High Delta Temperature 75 Circuit 1 High Delta Pressure 76 Circuit 1 Range Error 77 Circuit 1 Service Position Percent 78 Circuit 1 Valve ID 79 Circuit 2 Low SuperHeat 80 Circuit 2 Low Evaporation Pressure 81 Circuit 2 High Evaporation Pressure

82 Circuit 2 High Condenser Temperature 83 Circuit 2 Low Suction Pressure 84 Circuit 2 EEV Motor Error 85 Circuit 2 Self Tuning Error 86 Circuit 2 Emergency Close 87 Circuit 2 High Delta Temperature 88 Circuit 2 High Delta Pressure 89 Circuit 2 Range Error 90 Circuit 2 Service Position Percent 91 Circuit 2 Valve ID 92 Standalone Display Offline 93 Standalone Temperature Probe Alarm 94 Standalone Humidity Probe Alarm 96 c.pCOe Offline

97 Offline EBM Blower 1 99 Offline EBM Blower 2 101 Offline EBM Fan 1 103 Offline EBM Fan 2 105 Circuit 1 Low Return Air Temperature Alarm 106 Circuit 2 Low Return Air Temperature Alarm 107 Panel Switch

Reference (to Manual Section Unless Otherwise Noted) See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) section See latest revision of PGD/PGDx manual See latest revision of PGD/PGDx manual See latest revision of PGD/PGDx manual See Modbus Troubleshooting See Modbus Troubleshooting See Modbus Troubleshooting See Modbus Troubleshooting See Modbus Troubleshooting See Temperature Control section See Temperature Control section See Figure 74 (page 47)

Manual 2100-749D Page 66 of 69

SIDE VIEW
CONDENSER EXHAUST
SIDE VIEW
CONDENSER EXHAUST
SIDE VIEW
CONDENSER EXHAUST

FIGURE 93 Ventilation Airflow Paths
100% CLOSED LOOP
SUPPLY AIR

RETURN AIR
CONDENSER AIR
MIXED AIRFLOW
SUPPLY AIR

RETURN AIR EXHAUST AIR

FRESH AIR

CONDENSER AIR

100% OUTSIDE
SUPPLY AIR

EXHAUST AIR

FRESH AIR

CONDENSER AIR

FRONT VIEW

CONDENSER AIR
FRONT VIEW
FRESH AIR
CONDENSER AIR

FRONT VIEW

FRESH AIR
CONDENSER AIR
MIS-4250

Manual 2100-749D

Page

67 of 69

I/O Layout

FIGURE 94 I/O Layout

Manual 2100-749D Page 68 of 69

FIGURE 95 I/O Layout

Manual 2100-749D

Page

69 of 69

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Bard Air Conditioning System

MEGA-TEC® Wall-Mount Air Conditioner

LC6000-200 Supervisory Controller

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506 www.bardhvac.com

Manual:

2100-750E

Supersedes: 2100-750D

Date:

12-8-23

Page

1 of 45

CONTENTS

General Information.....................................................3 List of Necessary Materials/Tools..............................6 Site Preparation.............................................................7
Model Identification...............................................7 New Shelter Installation vs. Retrofit Installation........7 Minimum Clearance...............................................7 Clearance to Combustibles......................................8 Wall-Mount Unit Mounting..........................................9 Mounting the Units................................................9 Wall-Mount Unit Wiring.............................................14 Main Power Wiring...............................................14 Unit Control Voltage Wiring...................................14
230/208V Wiring...........................................14 460V Wiring..................................................14 Crankcase Heater Start Up.............................17 Preliminary Start Up...................................................18 Running in Orphan Mode......................................18 LC6000 Controller Installation..................................19 LC6000 Controller...............................................20 Mounting the LC6000 Controller.....................20 Installing Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor(s).....................21 Installing Optional Outdoor Temperature/ Humidity Sensor............................................23
FIGURES AND TABLES
Figure 1 MEGA-TEC Model Nomenclature...................6 Figure 2 Clearance Required for Service Access
and Adequate Condenser Airflow....................7 Figure 3 Unit Dimensions..........................................8 Figure 4 Lifting Lug Plates.........................................9 Figure 5 Mounting Instructions.................................10 Figure 6 Electric Heat Clearance..............................11 Figure 7 Wall Mounting Instructions..........................11 Figure 8 Wall Mounting Instructions..........................12 Figure 9 Common Wall Mounting Installations...........13 Figure 10 WIRING: VAC Supply Wiring Landing Points... 14 Figure 11 Side Communication and Power Wire
Entrances (Recommended).........................16 Figure 12 Rear Communication and Power Wire
Entrances (Optional)...................................16 Figure 13 Cooling and Heating Setpoints.....................18 Figure 14 Typical LC6000-200 Component Location....19 Figure 15 LC6000 Fused Power Supply Terminal.........20 Figure 16 Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity
Sensor Installation.....................................21 Figure 17 Additional Remote Sensor Installation..........22 Figure 18 Remote Outdoor Temperature/Humidity
Sensor Installation.....................................23 Figure 19 Emergency Off, Emergency Ventilation
and Generator Run Connections...................24 Figure 20 Communication Wiring (Daisy Chain)............25 Figure 21 Communication Wiring (Alt. Method)............25 Figure 22 Placement of Communication Filters............26 Figure 23 Communication Wiring: Termination at the
Controller..................................................27 Figure 24 Communication Wiring: Termination at the
First Wall-Mount Unit.................................28 Figure 25 Communication Wiring: Termination at
Additional Wall-Mount Units........................29 Figure 26 LC6000 Controller Circuit Install.................30 Figure 27 Controller Grounding Posts..........................30 Figure 28 WIRING: LC6000-200 Wiring Diagram.........32 Figure 29 TEC-EYE Connection to Unit Control............33 Figure 30 TEC-EYE Display and Interface....................33 Figure 31 Unit Configuration......................................34
Manual 2100-750E
Page 2 of 45

Emergency Off, Emergency Vent and Generator Run Connections............................24 Communication Wiring...................................25 Supply Wiring...............................................30 System Set Up..............................................................33 TEC-EYE Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool......................33 TEC-EYE Status Screen..................................34 Setting Up Wall-Mount Units for Operation.............34 1. Address Each Wall-Mount Unit....................34 2. Execute a Self Test on Each Unit................34 3. Clear Unit Alarm Logs on Each Unit............35 Setting Up LC6000 for Operation..........................35 4. Set LC Controller Date and Time.................36 5. Configure Sensors......................................36 6. Enter Total Number of Units.......................39 7. Verify Units are Online...............................39 8. Select Economizer Type for Each Zone.........39 9. Clear Controller Alarm Logs........................40 10. Complete Installation...............................40 Additional Information..............................................41 Menu Screens and Password Levels.......................41 Setpoints............................................................42 Calibrating Sensors..............................................42 A/C Circuit Information.........................................44 Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor Orientation..........................................................45

Figure 32 Executing Self Test.....................................35 Figure 33 Clearing Unit Alarm Logs............................35 Figure 34 LC6000 Controller Display and Interface........36 Figure 35 Setting Controller Date and Time.................36 Figure 36 Enable/Disable Zone 1 Indoor Humidity
Sensor......................................................37 Figure 37 Enable/Disable Zone 2 Indoor Humidity
Sensor......................................................37 Figure 38 Enable/Disable Zone 3 Indoor Humidity
Sensor......................................................37 Figure 39 Enable/Disable Zone 1 Indoor Temperature
Sensor......................................................37 Figure 40 Enable/Disable Zone1 Remote Temperature
Sensor......................................................38 Figure 41 Enable/Disable Zone 2 Remote Temperature
Sensor......................................................38 Figure 42 Enable/Disable Zone 3 Remote Temperature
Sensor......................................................38 Figure 43 Enable/Disable Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor... 39 Figure 44 Enable/Disable Outdoor Air Temperature
Sensor......................................................39 Figure 45 Total Units Displayed..................................39 Figure 46 Selecting Economizer Type..........................40 Figure 47 Clearing LC6000 Alarm Logs.......................40 Figure 48 Adjusting Sensor Offset Value......................42 Figure 49 MEGA-TEC Refrigeration Circuits.................44 Figure 50 Current Sensor Orientation..........................45 Figure 51 Earlier Sensor Orientation...........................45

Table 1
Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8

Minimum Clearances Required to Combustible Materials..................................8 Electrical Specifications..............................15 LC6000-200 Terminal Block Index..............31 LC6000/TEC-EYE Passwords (Default).........33 TEC-EYE Menu Structure............................41 LC6000 Controller Menu Structure..............41 Unit Status Messages.................................43 LC6000 Status Messages............................44

GENERAL INFORMATION

Air Conditioning System
This Bard air conditioning system is comprised of MEGA-TEC wall-mounted air conditioners matched with an LC6000 supervisory controller or Bard PGD/ PGDx stand-alone display. If only one wall-mounted air conditioner is being used, it can be matched with either the LC6000 supervisory controller or stand-alone controller (see Single Unit Operation on page 4 for information on the PGD and PGDx). If more than one wall mount is installed, the LC6000 controller must be matched with the air conditioning units. The wallmount units are specifically engineered for telecom/ motor control center rooms.

NOTE: The LC6000 supervisory controller or standalone display and MEGA-TEC wall-mount units are designed specifically to work together. The controller or stand-alone display cannot run other brands of systems, nor can other controllers run the MEGA-TEC wall-mount units. They are a complete system, and must be used together.
Controller
The LC6000 controller comes standard with the minimum accessories required for basic operation. Optional sensors may be required based on application (optional sensors shown below.)

LC6000-200 Series Controller and Accessories Included with Controller

(1) TEC-EYETM Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool Bard P/N 8301-059
(1) Remote Temperature/Humidity Sensor1 Bard P/N 8403-079

(1) LC6000 Programmable Logic Controller

(1) 35' 5-Wire 18 Gauge Shielded Cable

NOTE: The 2-wire, 18 gauge shielded cable used to communicate between the controller and wall-mount units is not included and must be field supplied.

(2) Communication EMI Filters Bard P/N 8301-055

Optional Sensors:

Outside Air Temperature/Humidity Sensor
Bard P/N 8301-090

Remote Temperature/Humidity Sensor1
Bard P/N 8403-079

Remote Temperature Only Sensor
Bard P/N 8301-058

1 One remote temperature/humidity sensor is included with the LC6000 controller. If the site in which the LC6000 controller will be used has more than one zone (maximum three zones), additional remote temperature/humidity sensors (one sensor per zone) will need to be purchased and installed in the additional zones. One additional temperature-only sensor (Bard P/N 8301-058) may also be used in Zone 1 but will also need to be purchased separately. Additional temperature/humidity sensors require field-supplied 5-wire 18 gauge shielded cable. Temperature-only sensors require field-supplied 2-wire 18 gauge shielded cable.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

3 of 45

Wall-Mount Air Conditioner Units
MEGA-TEC units operate on VAC power. If equipped with an economizer, the units will supply full rated cooling airflow in free cooling mode with ability to exhaust the same amount through the unit itself without any additional relief openings in the shelter.
MEGA-TEC units are fully charged with refrigerant and are available with optional electric heat and/or electric reheat dehumidification.
NOTE: 575V models take incoming field power and stepdown secondary to 460V which supplies most components except compressors and electric heat which remain 575V. Reference wiring diagrams for more information.
Single Unit Operation
A PGD or PGDx stand-alone display can be used in place of the LC6000 controller when only one MEGATEC wall-mount air conditioner is being installed. If using a PGD or PGDx stand-alone display instead of the LC6000 controller, the alarm logging and remote communication capabilities of the LC6000 controller will not be available. See PGD manual 2100-734 or PGDx manual 2100-740 for information on installing and setting up a stand-alone display for single unit operation.
General
The equipment covered in this manual is to be installed by trained, experienced service and installation technicians.
The refrigerant system is completely assembled and charged. All internal wiring is complete.
The unit is designed for use with or without duct work. Flanges are provided for attaching the supply and return ducts.
These instructions explain the recommended method to install the air cooled self-contained unit and the electrical wiring connections to the unit.
These instructions and any instructions packaged with any separate equipment required to make up the entire air conditioning system should be carefully read before beginning the installation. Note particularly any tags and/or labels attached to the equipment.
While these instructions are intended as a general recommended guide, they do not supersede any national and/or local codes in any way. Authorities having jurisdiction should be consulted before the installation is made. See Additional Publications for information on codes and standards.
Sizing of systems for proposed installation should be based on heat loss and heat gain calculations made according to methods of Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA). The supply flange should be installed

in accordance with the Standards of the National Fire Protection Association for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems of Other Than Residence Type, NFPA No. 90A, and Residence Type Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems, NFPA No. 90B. Where local regulations are at a variance with instructions, installer should adhere to local codes.
Shipping Damage
Upon receipt of equipment, the cartons should be checked for external signs of shipping damage. If damage is found, the receiving party must contact the last carrier immediately, preferably in writing, requesting inspection by the carrier's agent.
These units must remain in upright position at all times; do not lay on side. Do not stack units.
Additional Publications
These publications can help when installing the air conditioner. They can usually be found at the local library or purchased directly from the publisher. Be sure to consult the current edition of each standard.
National Electrical Code.......................ANSI/NFPA 70
Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ....................ANSI/NFPA 90A
Standard for Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.............ANSI/NFPA 90B
Load Calculation for Residential Winter and Summer Air Conditioning.............. ACCA Manual J
For more information, contact these publishers:
Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA) 1712 New Hampshire Ave. N.W. Washington, DC 20009 Telephone: (202) 483-9370 Fax: (202) 234-4721
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 11 West Street, 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 Telephone: (212) 642-4900 Fax: (212) 302-1286
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 Telephone: (404) 636-8400 Fax: (404) 321-5478
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Batterymarch Park P. O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9901 Telephone: (800) 344-3555 Fax: (617) 984-7057

Manual 2100-750E Page 4 of 45

ANSI Z535.5 Definitions:
DANGER: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. The signal word "DANGER" is to be limited to the most extreme situations. DANGER [signs] should not be used for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to these levels is also involved.
WARNING: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING [signs] should not be used for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to this level is also involved.
CAUTION: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION [signs] without a safety alert symbol may be used to alert against unsafe practices that can result in property damage only.
NOTICE: [this header is] preferred to address practices not related to personal injury. The safety alert symbol shall not be used with this signal word. As an alternative to "NOTICE" the word "CAUTION" without the safety alert symbol may be used to indicate a message not related to personal injury.

! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Have a properly trained individual perform these tasks. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.
! WARNING
Fire hazard. Maintain minimum 1/4" clearance between the supply air duct and combustible materials in the first 3' of ducting. Failure to do so could result in fire causing damage, injury or death.
! WARNING
Heavy item hazard. Use more than one person to handle unit. Failure to do so could result in unit damage or serious injury.

! CAUTION
Sharp metallic edges.
Take care and wear appropriate protective devices to avoid accidental contact with sharp edges.
Failure to do so can result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT
When connecting this product from a remote location, ensure that the network connection is secure and reliable.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

5 of 45

LIST OF NECESSARY MATERIALS/TOOLS

Additional hardware and miscellaneous supplies are needed for installation. These items are field supplied and must be sourced before installation. This list also includes tools needed for installation.

List of Materials/Tools
· Personal protective equipment/safety devices/ anti-static wrist straps
· SG-15W supply grille and RG-15W return grille
· Field-fabricated sleeves (if necessary)
· Fasteners sufficient for mounting the units such as 5/16" diameter anchor/lag bolts
· 7/8" diameter washers
· Fasteners appropriate for the shelter wall construction to attach the controller to the wall
· Commercial grade outdoor silicone sealant
· Miscellaneous hand and power tools and jobsite or shop materials
· Lifting equipment with the necessary capacity and rigging to safely move/install the unit. The unit is supplied with lifting lug plates on each side at top of unit. Remount in upright position for use (see page 9).

· Electrical supplies
- Various size circuit breakers for the shelter AC breaker box (see Table 2 on page 15)
- High-voltage wire of various gauges (see Table 2 on page 15)
- 16 gauge minimum, 14 gauge maximum power wire to connect controller to shelter power source
- 5-wire, 18 gauge shielded cable for remote temperature and humidity sensors (2-wire, 18 gauge shielded cable for temperature-only sensors)
- Communication wire: 2-wire, 18 gauge, shielded with drain
- 18 gauge non-shielded wire for connecting emergency off, emergency vent and/or generator relays, if applicable, to controller
- CAT 6 Ethernet cable of field-determined length (for remote communication, if applicable)
- 2 hole grounding lug (to be used with supplied 1/4" bolts and nuts for grounding controller box)
- Miscellaneous electrical supplies including rigid/ flexible conduit and fittings, 2" x 4" junction boxes (one per temperature/humidity sensor), wire connectors and supports

FIGURE 1 MEGA-TEC Wall-Mount Unit Model Nomenclature

W 180 B P S 0Z E P X X X X

MODEL SERIES
NOMINAL TOTAL CAPACITY 180 15 Ton 3 Stage Capacity
REVISION B Revision Level
CONTROL LOGIC AND CLIMATE OPTIONS P Programmable Logic Board
E Electric Reheat Dehumidification (Available w/18 kW only)

PACKAGING OPTIONS X Steel Skid with Carton 1 Steel Skid with Crate
COIL AND UNIT COATING OPTIONS X Standard 1 Coated Evaporator 2 Coated Condenser 3 Coated Evaporator and Condenser
OUTLET X Standard

VOLTS & PHASE N 400/380-60-3
Q 575-60-3 S 230/208-60-3 , 220/200-50-3
T 460-60-3, 415/380-50-3

COLOR X Beige Baked Enamel Finish 1 White Baked Enamel Finish 4 Gray Baked Enamel Finish S Stainless Steel

KW 0Z O kW with Circuit Breaker 09 9 kW with Circuit Breaker 18 18 kW with Circuit Breaker 36 36 kW with Circuit Breaker

FILTER OPTIONS M MERV11 Disposable P MERV8 2" Pleated N MERV13 2" Pleated
VENT B No Vent E Economizer (DB and WB)

Manual 2100-750E Page 6 of 45

SITE PREPARATION

Model Identification
Identify the specific model using the model nomenclature information found in Figure 1 and the model/serial tag found on the unit. See Figure 3 on page 8 for dimensions and critical installation requirements.
New Shelter Installation vs. Retrofit Installation
These installation instructions cover both new shelter installations and retrofit installations. Each installation is unique and may require special accommodations and modifications. Although Bard Manufacturing follows a long-established tradition of manufacturing equipment using industry standard dimensions for building penetration, it is occasionally necessary to move or enlarge supply and return openings when replacing non-standardized equipment in a retrofit application.

Minimum Clearance
To maintain full service access and adequate condenser airflow, side-by-side installations require 28" of clearance between units for access to the economizer (20" of clearance between units without economizers) and proper airflow of the outdoor coil (see Figure 2). Additional clearance may be required to meet local or national codes.
Care should be taken to ensure that the recirculation and obstruction of condenser discharge air does not occur. Recirculation of condenser discharge air can be from either a single unit or multiple units. Any object such as shrubbery, a building or a large object can cause obstructions to the condenser discharge air. Recirculation or reduced airflow caused by obstructions will result in reduced capacity, possible unit pressure safety lockouts and reduced unit service life.
For units that blow condenser air out the front of the unit, such as these wall-mount units, it is recommended there be a minimum distance of 10' between the front of the unit and any barrier or 20' between the fronts of two opposing (facing) units.

FIGURE 2 Clearance Required for Service Access and Adequate Condenser Airflow

SHELTER EQUIPMENT

5ft*
SUPPLYAIR

5078"

UNIT #1

5FT * SUPPLY AIR

UNIT #2

5078"

10ft

OUTDOOR

10FT

CLEARANCE AREA

20"

7412"

20" NON-ECONO 28" WITH ECONO

7412"

* Recommended distance between both supply and return air openings and equipment in room. Airstream must be able to provide adequate air circulation throughout the room.

All national, state and local codes must be observed and followed during installation.

20" MIS-4255

Manual 2100-750E

Page

7 of 45

Clearance to Combustibles
The supply air duct flange and the first 3' of supply air duct require a minimum of 1/4" clearance to combustible material. See Figure 5 on page 10 for details on opening sizes.

TABLE 1 Minimum Clearances Required to
Combustible Materials

Model Supply Air Duct (1st 3')

All Models

1/4"

Cabinet 0"

FIGURE 3 Unit Dimensions

91.50 ECON 74.50 NON-ECON

FILTER / HEATER

ACCESS PANEL 91.50 ECON

ACCESS PANEL

74.50 NON-ECON

BLOFWILETRERAC/ HCEEASTSEPRANEL ACCESS PANEL

BLOWFEILRTEARCC/ EHSESATPEARNEL ACCESS PANEL

ECONOMIZER HOOD
USED ON ECON MODELS ONLY
CIRCUIT BREAKER OR TOGGLE DISCONNECT
ECONAOMCICZEERSHSOPLOOADCKNAEBLLE
USED ON ECON MODELS ONLY
CIRCUIT BREAKER OR TOGGLE DISCONNECT
ACCESS PANE4.L50
1.99 LOCKABLE

15.75 4.50
1.99
26.05 15.75
94.23
216.705

94.23

2218..7659

28.69

CONTROL ACCESS PANEL CONTROL ACCESS PANEL BLOWER ACCESS PANEL BLOWER ACCESS PANEL

CONTROL ACCESS PANEL CONTROL ACCESS PANEL

CONDENSER OUTLET AIR CONDENSER OUTLET AIR

DRAIN

STEEL PLATFORM ADDS 4.500" HEIGHT TO VERTICAL

STEEL PLATFORM

79.50

CONDENSER OUTLET AIR CONDENSER OUTLET AIR

DRAIN 54.75

DRAIN

STEEL PLATFORM ADDS 4.500" HEIG1H5T.T7O5 VERTICAL

SUPPLY AISRTOEPEELNPILNAGTFORM

79.50

54.75 SUPPLY AIR OPENING

15.75

54.75 RETURN AIR OPENING
54.75 RETURN AIR OPENING

21.75 4.02
21.75 4.02

36.92 36.92 21.86

BUILT IN RAIN HOOD 0.5° PITCH

Ø.875

COMMUNICATION

ELECTRICAL ENTRANCE

OPTIONAL ENTRANBCUE ILLOTCAINTERDAIN HOOD

ON BOTH SIDES OF UNIT

0.5° PITCH

Ø1Ø.0.89745 HICGOHMVMOULNTAICGAETION ELEELCETCRTIRCIACLAEL NETNRTARNACNECE
OPOTIPOTNIOALNAELNTERNATNRCANECLEOCLOATCEADTED ONOBNOBTHOTSHIDSEISDEOSFOUFNUITNIT

Ø1.094

ECONOMHIZIGERHHVOOOLDTAGE

USED ON EECOLNEMCOTDERLSICONALYL ENTRANCE 40.36

21.86

OPTIONAL ENTRANCE LOCATED

35.44

ON BOTH SIDES OF UNIT

37.36

ECONOMIZER HOOD
USED ON ECON MODELS ONLY

35.44

.5" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES

40.36 43.570.36

TOP RAIN FLASHING

SHIPPING LOCATION

4.50

FLASHING IS SHIPPED ATTACHED
TO SID.5E"MDOIUAN.TING FLANGE

MOUNTING HOLES

6.69 TOP RAIN FLASHING

SHØIP1P.0IN94G LOCATION

FLASOHPINGTIISOSNHIPAPLEDRATETAACRHED
TO SIDE MOUNTING FLANGE
ELECTRICAL ENTRANCE

OPTIONAL REAR ELECTRICAL ENTRANCE

6.69

LOCATED ON LEFT AND RIGHT OF UNIT BACK

Ø1.094

35O.4P4TIONAL REAR ELECTRICAL ENTRANCE
33.20OPTIONAL REAR ELECTRICAL ENTRANCE

31.20

LOCATED ON LEFT AND RIGHT OF UNIT BACK

29.20

35.44 33.20 31.20 29.20

50.90

50.90
VENTILATION AIR
VENTILATION AIR
51.90 STEEL PLATFORM
53.00 56.00 51.90 STEEL PLATFORM 53.00 56.00

94.23

92.24

76.49

94.23

50.44 92.24 28.69
76.49

50R.4E4MOVABLE BUMPER
REMOVE BUMPER BEFORE
28.69 MOUNTING UNIT TO WALL.

REMOVABLE BUMPER
REMOVE BUMPER BEFORE MOUNTING UNIT TO WALL.

MIS-4123 D MIS-4123 D

All dimensions are in inches. Dimensional drawings are not to scale.

Manual 2100-750E Page 8 of 45

WALL-MOUNT UNIT MOUNTING

Mounting the Units
! WARNING
Unit falling hazard. Use only sufficiently rated mechanical lifting means with proper rigging to raise the unit for mounting. Failure to follow this warning could result in injury or death.
! WARNING
Heavy item hazard. Ensure structural strength of wall is sufficient to carry weight of unit and complies with all building codes. Failure to follow this warning could result in injury or death.
FIGURE 4 Lifting Lug Plates
Lifting Plate (in upright position)
Lifting Plate (in shipping position)
Top of Unit

Install the provided filter access panel handles here
2.125"

6.25" 2.25" Diameter
35"

MIS-4249
5" 5°
2-3/8"

NOTE: It may be best to spot some electrical knockouts (such as those located on the side and rear of the wall-mount unit) before units are mounted and access is unavailable or limited (see Figure 3 to locate pre-punched knockouts).
Heavy duty lifting lug plates are installed on each side of the unit to allow the unit to be lifted and installed on a structure. The plates must be removed and reinstalled in upright position (see Figure 4) for use and can be removed after installation.
Two filter access panel handles are shipped with the unit. Attach handles to front of filter access panels using screws included with the handles as shown in Figure 4.
Two holes for the supply and return air openings must be cut through the wall as shown in Figure 5 on page 10. On wood frame walls, the wall construction must be strong and rigid enough to carry the weight of the unit without transmitting any unit vibration. All walls must be thoroughly inspected to ensure that they are capable of carrying the weight of the installed unit.
In retrofit (unit replacement) installations, the openings cut for the original equipment may not line up exactly with needs of this installation. Modifications may need to be made, such as increasing or decreasing the size of the wall cutouts. The existing bolt placement may not line up in which case the original bolts would need to be removed or cut away.
1. These units are secured by full-length mounting flanges built into the cabinet on each side which secure the unit to the outside wall surface. Mounting holes in flanges are 1/2" diameter.
2. The unit itself is suitable for 0" clearance, but the supply air duct flange and the first 3' of supply air duct require a minimum of 1/4" clearance to combustible material. See Figure 5 for details on opening sizes.
3. Locate and mark lag bolt locations and location for optional bottom mounting bracket, if desired (see Figure 5).
4. If desired, hook top rain flashing (attached to side mounting flange for shipping) under back bend of top.
5. Position unit in opening and secure with fasteners sufficient for the application such as 5/16" lag/ anchor/carriage bolts; use 7/8" diameter flat washers on the lag bolts. It is recommended that a bead of silicone caulking be placed behind the side mounting flanges.
NOTE: For economizer models, mount hoods after unit is installed so as to not block unit flange holes.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

9 of 45

6. Secure optional rain flashing to wall and caulk across entire length of top (see Figure 5).
7. For additional mounting rigidity, the return air and supply air frames or collars can be drilled and screwed or welded to the structural wall itself (depending upon wall construction). Be sure to observe required clearance if combustible wall.
8. A plastic drain hose extends from each drain pan at the top of the unit down to the unit base. There are openings in the unit base for the drain hoses to pass through.

NOTE: Ensure hose doesn't kink inside of unit when pulling hose through holes in base. This could prevent proper drainage.
Additional openings exist in the condenser fan panel section for front drainage (if desired). To use the front drainage option, connect the hose going through the base to the connector in the additional hose provided for front drainage.
In the event the drain hose is connected to a drain system of some type, it must be an open or vented type system to assure proper drainage.

FIGURE 5 Mounting Instructions
SEAL WITH BEAD OF CAULKING ALONG
ENTIRE LENGTH OF TOP.

RAIN FLASHING

FOAM AIR SEAL

1212" 1212" 1212" 1212" 1212" 1212" 1212"

76316" *5514" 5434"

WALL TOP
1534" *1614" 26132" 2134" 241116"

10.713 Wall Opening and Hole Location View
* INCLUDES 0.25" CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

Right Side View

0.250" CLEARANCE ON ALL FOUR SIDES OF SUPPLY AIR DUCT IS REQUIRED FROM COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS SUPPLY AIR DUCT STRUCTURE WALL
RETURN AIR DUCT
NOTE:
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A BEAD OF SILICONE CAULKING BE PLACED BEHIND THE SIDE MOUNTING FLANGES AND UNDER TOP FLASHING AT TIME OF INSTALLATION.
MIS-4254

Manual 2100-750E Page 10 of 45

FIGURE 6 Electric Heat Clearance

Typical Building Outside Sheeting
Unit Supply Air Duct Flange of Wall

Wall Frame
Inside Sheeting Supply Air Duct
1/4" Min. See Note Below

SUPPLY AIR OPENING

Note: Side section view of supply air duct for wall mounted unit showing 1/4" clearance to combustible surfaces.

MIS-277 A
FIGURE 7 Wall Mounting Instructions
FACTORY SUPPLIED RAIN FLASHING. MOUNT ON UNIT
BEFORE INSTALLATION
SUPPLY AIR OPENING

WALL STRUCTURE SUPPLY AIR
DUCT

RETURN AIR OPENING

WOOD OR STEEL SIDING
CONCRETE BLOCK WALL INSTALLATION WOOD FRAME WALL INSTALLATION

SIDE VIEW

MIS-3947

Manual 2100-750E

Page

11 of 45

INTERIOR FINISHED WALL OVER FRAME
EXTERIOR FINISH WALL OVER FRAME

FIGURE 8 Wall Mounting Instructions

See Figure 3, Unit Dimensions, for actual dimensions.

ATTACH TO TOP PLATE OF WALL
0.250" CLEARANCE ALL AROUND DUCT

E +1.000

14"

SUPPLY DUCT OPENING

RETURN DUCT

OPENING

FRAMING MATERIAL 2 X 4's, 2 X 6's &/OR STRUCTURAL STEEL

ATTACH TO BOTTOM PLATE OF WALL

THIS STRUCTURAL MEMBER LOCATED TO MATCH STUD SPACING FOR REST OF WALL. SECOND MEMBER MAY BE REQUIRED FOR SOME WALLS.

MIS-4253

Manual 2100-750E Page 12 of 45

FIGURE 9 Common Wall Mounting Installations

RAIN FLASHING

RAFTERS

RAIN FLASHING

FINISHED CEILING SURFACE
SUPPLY AIR DUCT WITH GRILLE
WALL SLEEVE

RAFTERS SUPPLY AIR
DUCT
FINISHED CEILING SURFACE

RETURN AIR DUCT WITH GRILLE
WALL SLEEVE

OUTSIDE WALL
FREE AIR-FLOW NO DUCT

OUTSIDE WALL
DUCTED SUPPLY RETURN AT UNIT

RAIN FLASHING

RAFTERS
SUPPLY AIR DUCT

RAIN FLASHING

RAFTERS
SUPPLY AIR GRILLE

FINISHED WALL SURFACE
WALL SLEEVE

FINISHED CEILING
CLOSET WALLS

FALSE WALL

OUTSIDE WALL

RETURN GRILLE

FAALLSSE WALL INSTALLATITION

WALL SLEEVE
RAISED FLOOR

OUTSIDE WALL

RETURN GRILLE

CLOSET INSTALLATION

MIS-3954

Manual 2100-750E

Page

13 of 45

WALL-MOUNT UNIT WIRING
! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Have a properly trained individual perform these tasks. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.

FIGURE 10 VAC Supply Wiring Landing Points

230/208V

460V

Main Power Wiring
Refer to the unit rating plate or the electrical specifications in Table 2 for wire sizing information and maximum fuse or circuit breaker size. Each outdoor unit is marked with a "Minimum Circuit Ampacity". The field wiring used must be sized to carry that amount of current. Depending on the installed KW of electric heat, there may be two field power circuits required. If this is the case, the unit rating plate will so indicate. All models are suitable only for connection with copper wire. Each unit and/or wiring diagram will be marked "Use Copper Conductors Only". These instructions must be adhered to. Refer to the National Electrical Code (NEC) for complete current carrying capacity data on the various insulation grades of wiring material. All wiring must conform to NEC and all local codes.
The unit rating plate and Table 2 list fuse and wire sizes (75°C copper) for all models including the most commonly used heater sizes. Also shown are the number of field power circuits required for the various models with heaters.
The unit rating plate lists a maximum circuit breaker or fuse that is to be used with the equipment. The correct size must be used for proper circuit protection and also to assure that there will be no nuisance tripping due to the momentary high starting current of the compressor motor.
The main unit circuit breaker disconnect access is located on the front panel of the unit.
Route all field power wires in channel under the control panel. See Figure 10 to reference VAC landing points.
Route wires into unit through recommended side entrances (see Figure 11 on page 16). Optional rear entry points are also available (see Figure 12 on page 16).
NOTE: Field wires enter on left side for line side connection.
When running wires to unit from shelter, be careful to not place wiring and conduit where it will interfere with opening filter access doors.

MIS-4259
MIS-4260
Unit Control Voltage Wiring
NOTE: The voltage should be measured at the field power connection point in the unit and while the unit is operating at full load (maximum amperage operating condition.
230/208V Wiring
230/208V 3 phase equipment use dual primary voltage transformers. All equipment leaves the factory wired on 240V tap. It is very important that the correct voltage tap is used. For 208V operation, reconnect from 240V to 208V tap. The acceptable operating voltage range for the 240 and 208V taps are: 240V tap (253 216) and 208 tap (215 197).
460V Wiring
460V 3 phase equipment use triple primary voltage transformers. All equipment leaves the factory wired on 480V tap. It is very important that the correct voltage tap is used. The acceptable operating voltage range for the 480V, 415V and 380V taps are: 480V tap (429 and above), 415 Tap (395 428) and 380 tap (below 395). For 400V N models, use the 415V tap.
NOTE: 575V models take incoming field power and stepdown secondary to 460V which supplies most components except compressors and electric heat which remain 575V. Reference wiring diagrams for more information.
For communication wiring, a 2-wire, 18 gauge colorcoded shielded cable with drain is recommended.

Manual 2100-750E Page 14 of 45

Model

Rated Volts & Phase

No. Field Power Circuits

W180BPS0Z S09 S18 S36

230/208-3

W180BPT0Z T09 T18 T36

460-3

W180BPN0Z N09 N18 N36

400-3

W180BPQ0Z Q09 Q18 Q36

575-3

1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 3
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1

Minimum Circuit
Ampacity
85 85 85 115
40 40 40 58
47 47 47 51
31 31 31 48

W180BP Series

Single Circuit

Multiple Circuits

Maximum External Fuse or Ckt. Brkr.

Field Power
Wire Size

Ground
Wire

Minimum Circuit Maximum External

Ampacity

Fuse or Ckt. Breaker Field Power Wire Size

Ground Wire Size

Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C

100

54 32

60 50

10 10

100

54 32

60 50

10 10

100

54 32

60 50

10 10

125

54 55 55 60 60 60

10 10 10

TABLE 2 Electrical Specifications

Model

Rated Volts & Phase

No. Field Power Circuits

Minimum Circuit
Ampacity

W180BE Series

Single Circuit

Multiple Circuits

Maximum External Fuse or Ckt. Brkr.

Field Power
Wire Size

Ground
Wire

Minimum Circuit Maximum External

Ampacity

Fuse or Ckt. Breaker Field Power Wire Size

Ground Wire Size

Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C Ckt. A Ckt. B Ckt. C

W180BES18 230/208-3 1 or 3

140

150

1/0

54 59 28 60 60 30

10 10 10 10

W180BET18 460-3

54 14

60 20

10 12

W180BEN18 400-3

59 12

60 20

10 12

W180BEQ18 575-3

These "Minimum Circuit Ampacity" values are to be used for sizing the field power conductors. Refer to the National Electrical code (latest version), Article 310 for power conductor sizing. CAUTION: When more than one field power circuit is run through one conduit, the conductors must be derated. Pay special attention to note 8 of Table 310 regarding Ampacity Adjustment Factors when more than three (3) current carrying conductors are in a raceway.
Maximum size of the time delay fuse or circuit breaker for protection of field wiring conductors.
Based on 75°copper wire. All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code and all local codes.
NOTE: The Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOCP) value listed is the maximum value as per UL 1995 calculations for MOCP (branch-circuit conductor sizes in this chart are based on this MOCP). The actual factory-installed overcurrent protective device (circuit breaker) in this model may be lower than the maximum UL 1995 allowable MOCP value, but still above the UL 1995 minimum calculated value or Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) listed.
IMPORTANT: While this electrical data is presented as a guide, it is important to electrically connect properly sized fuses and conductor wires in accordance with the National Electrical Code and all local codes.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

15 of 45

FIGURE 11 Side Communication and Power Wire Entrances (Recommended)

COMMUNICATION WIRE ENTRANCE

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER WIRE ENTRANCE

Route communication wiring and power supply wiring in their own separate conduits. They must not be run together. Use 2-wire, 18 gauge shielded cable with drain for communication wire.

FIGURE 12 Rear Communication and Power Wire Entrances (Optional)

MIS-4251

OPTIONAL REAR POWER ENTRANCE
OPTIONAL REAR COMMUNICATION ENTRANCE
MIS-4252 Manual 2100-750E Page 16 of 45

OPTIONAL REAR POWER ENTRANCE OPTIONAL REAR COMMUNICATION ENTRANCE
Route communication wiring and power supply wiring in their own separate conduits. They must not be run together. Use 2-wire, 1M8IS-g42a5u2ge shielded cable with drain for communication wire.

Crankcase Heater Start Up
All units covered in this manual are provided with compressor crankcase heat.
This crankcase heater is a band-type heater located around the bottom of the compressor. This heater is controlled by the crankcase heater relay. The heater is only energized when the compressor is not running.
Crankcase heat is essential to prevent liquid refrigerant from migrating to the compressor, preventing oil pump out on compressor start up and possible bearing or scroll vane failure due to compressing a liquid.
IMPORTANT: The following procedure must be followed at initial start-up and at any time power has been removed for 12 hours or longer.
To prevent compressor damage which may result from the presence of liquid refrigerant in the compressor crankcase:
1. Make certain the room thermostat is in the "off" position (the compressor is not to operate).
2. Apply power by closing the system disconnect switch. This energizes the compressor heater which evaporates the liquid refrigerant in the crankcase.
3. Allow 4 hours or 60 minutes per pound of refrigerant in the system as noted on the unit rating plate, whichever is greater.
4. After properly elapsed time, the thermostat may be set to operate the compressor.
5. Do not open system disconnect switch except as required for safety while servicing.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

17 of 45

PRELIMINARY START UP

Running in Orphan Mode
With the AC breakers turned on, each MEGA-TEC wallmount unit has the capability to run without the LC6000 controller connected--this feature is called orphan mode. This keeps the shelter between 55°F and 78°F (factory default settings) by the use of the factory-installed return air sensor in each wall-mount unit. In orphan mode, the wall unit uses a continuous blower setting to circulate room air into the return air inlet and uses the return air temperature sensor to control room temperature.
The wall-mount unit can be turned on and off with the TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool. When ON is chosen, the wall-mount unit will heat or cool. When set to OFF using the TEC-EYE, the wall-mount unit will not heat, cool or ventilate.
To turn the unit on or off with TEC-EYE:
1. Connect the TEC-EYE diagnostic tool to the control board located in the unit.
2. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to On/Off; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to change value from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON.
6. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
To verify or change the wall-mount unit cooling and heating setpoints in orphan mode:
1. Connect the TEC-EYE diagnostic tool to the control board located in the unit.
2. From the Status screen, press UP or DOWN key until Quick Menu displays Setpoints (SET) icon. Press ENTER key.
3. Press ENTER key to scroll to the selected choice (see Figure 13).
4. Press UP or DOWN key on desired value until value displays correctly.
5. Press ENTER key to save and scroll to next parameter.
6. Press ESCAPE key until Main Menu screen is displayed.

FIGURE 13 Cooling and Heating Setpoints
During installation, the ability to run in orphan mode allows deactivation of one of the existing, older wallmount units, while keeping the shelter cool with the other unit still operating. Once the first of the Bard MEGA-TEC wall-mount units is installed, orphan mode can be enabled early in the installation--keeping the climate inside the shelter stable and the installers comfortable while the remainder of the older equipment is removed and the remaining Bard MEGA-TEC wallmount units and LC6000 controller are installed. Additionally, should any or all of the MEGA-TEC wallmount units lose communication with the LC6000 controller (such as during maintenance), they will continue to serve the shelter's needs until a repair can be made.

Manual 2100-750E Page 18 of 45

LC6000 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
FIGURE 14 Typical LC6000-200 Component Location

Transformer
RJ11 Cable to Display
Ethernet Cable Connection
Four Fused Power Supply
Terminals Emergency Off Alarm Jumper Emergency Vent Alarm Jumper Generator Run Alarm Jumper

Control Board USB Male A to Micro Male B Cable
Terminal Block

Manual 2100-750E

Page

19 of 45

! WARNING
Electrical shock hazard. Disconnect VAC power supplies before servicing. Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death.
IMPORTANT: When working with circuit board components, Bard recommends the use of an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static electricity shorts to electronic controls.
LC6000 Controller
The LC6000 controller is part of this air conditioning system. It is used to control up to fourteen (14) wall-mount air conditioners from one controller. The microprocessor control provides an easy-to-read interface with large LCD graphical display. It provides control for redundancy for the structure and equal wear on all units.
Conduit is recommended for all wiring. Route communication wiring and power supply wiring in their own separate conduits.
The LC6000 controller is not weatherproof and is intended for use in a weathertight structure.

Mounting the LC6000 Controller
The dimensions of the LC controller are 16" x 12" x 6".
Because the LC6000 controller utilizes a remote temperature sensor as opposed to one located in the controller box, the controller itself can be installed in any indoor location that is suitable, preferably at eye level. Four (4) mounting holes are provided for mounting to the wall and holes for conduit connections are provided in the base, sides and top of the controller.
The LC6000 controller includes four fused power supply terminals in the terminal block. Before connecting wires to the terminal block, confirm that the fuse in each of the four fuse holders is in the proper position (active) as shown in Figure 15.

FIGURE 15 LC6000 Fused Power Supply Terminal

Fuse in Active Position

Manual 2100-750E Page 20 of 45

Shipping Position

Installing Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor(s)
One remote indoor temperature/humidity sensor and 35' of 18 gauge 5-conductor shielded cable is included with the controller. This sensor must be installed for proper operation. Mount the temperature/humidity sensor in a location least likely to be affected by open doors, rack-mounted fans, radiant heat sources, etc. Locating the sensor between both return grilles is often the best location, but every installation is unique. Location height should be approximately 60" above the floor. The sensor is best mounted on a 2" x 4" junction box and it is recommended that the cable be in conduit. Use shielded cable to connect to controller. The maximum cable length to connect the temperature/humidity sensor to the LC6000 is 98'.
FIGURE 16 Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor Installation
1. Connect wires from the 18 gauge shielded cable to terminals #12, #13, #18, #19 and #22.

TB#

Wire Mark

Sensor

Description

18 B6 NTC OUT Indoor Remote Sensor (Zone 1)

19 GND NTC OUT Ground

12 B2 OUT H Remote Indoor Humidity Sensor: 0-1 VDC (Zone 1)

13 GND M (GO) Ground 22 +VDC + (G) Power for B2

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4142 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

2. Connect the other end of the shielded cable to the sensor terminals. Be sure wires are connected to proper terminals as shown in table above.
Sensor jumpers need to be positioned for 0-1 V. With sensor oriented as shown in image to right, move both jumpers to right position (DP1 and DP2 set to OFF). This applies to all indoor temperature/humidity sensors connected to the LC controller. See illustration mounted inside of sensor cover for further detail on jumper position.
Earlier versions of this sensor may be mounted in a different orientation which would affect the positioning of the sensor jumpers. See page 45 for additional information on sensor orientation.

Jumper
DP1 DP2

Manual 2100-750E

Page

21 of 45

For proper operation, the remote indoor temperature/humidity sensor (and any additional sensors) must be configured properly with the controller as shown in Step 2 on page 21. An additional remote indoor temperatureonly sensor can be purchased and installed in Zone 1. If the site in which the LC6000 controller will be used has more than one zone (maximum three zones per LC6000), additional remote temperature/humidity sensors (one per zone) will need to be purchased and installed in the additional zones. All installed sensors must be enabled in the controller menu (see Configure Sensors beginning on page 36).
FIGURE 17 Additional Remote Indoor Temperature and Temperature/Humidity Sensor Installation
One additional temperature sensor can be added to Zone 1 and additional temperature/humidity sensors may be added to Zones 2 and 3 (one per zone). Be sure the sensors are connected to the proper terminals on the terminal block and sensor as listed below. The maximum cable length to connect temperature or temperature/humidity sensors to the LC6000 is 98'.

Zone 1: Optional Remote Temperature Sensor Terminals 20 & 21*

TB#

Wire Mark

Description

20 B7 Indoor Remote Sensor (Zone 1 optional)

21 GND Ground

* The two wire connections for the optional remote temperature sensor are not polarity sensitive.

Zone 2: Optional Remote Temperature/Humidity Sensor Terminals 26, 27, 14, 15 & 23
IMPORTANT: Note jumper position in Figure 16

TB#

Wire Mark

Sensor

Description

26 B8 NTC OUT Indoor Remote Sensor (Zone 2)

27 GND NTC OUT Ground

14 B3 OUT H Remote Indoor Humidity Sensor: 0-1 VDC (Zone 2)

15 GND M (GO) Ground

23 +VDC + (G) Power for B3

Zone 3: Optional Remote Temperature/Humidity Sensor Terminals 28, 29, 16, 17 & 24
IMPORTANT: Note jumper position in Figure 16

TB#

Wire Mark

Sensor

Description

28 B9 NTC OUT Indoor Remote Sensor (Zone 3)

29 GND NTC OUT Ground

16 B4 OUT H Remote Indoor Humidity Sensor: 0-1 VDC (Zone 3)

17 GND M (GO) Ground

24 +VDC + (G) Power for B4

Zones 2 and 3 can also use temperature-only sensors in place of the temperature/humidity sensors. Zone 2 will connect to TB# 26 and 27. Zone 3 will connect to TB# 28 and 29. The wire connections for the temperature-only sensors are not polarity sensitive.

Manual 2100-750E Page 22 of 45

Installing Optional Outdoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor
One optional outdoor temperature/humidity sensor (8301-090) can be installed. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions. Use 18 gauge 5-conductor shielded cable to connect to controller. The maximum cable length to connect the temperature/humidity sensor to the LC6000 is 98'.

FIGURE 18 Remote Outdoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor Installation
1. Connect wires from the 18 gauge shielded cable to terminals #65, #66, #67, #70 and #71.

TB#

Wire Mark

70 B12

71 ND

Sensor

Description

Remote Outdoor Temperature Sensor

Ground

67 B11

Remote Outdoor Humidity Sensor: 0-10 VDC

66 GND 65 +VDC

Ground

+VDC

3 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

62 61 64 63 66 65 68 67 70 69 72 71

2. Connect the other end of the shielded cable to the sensor terminals. Be sure wires are connected to proper terminals as shown in table above.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

23 of 45

Emergency Off, Emergency Ventilation and Generator Run Connections The LC6000-200 controller is shipped with emergency off, emergency ventilation and generator run contacts. There are factory-installed jumpers across terminals #6 and #7 (emergency off), #8 and #9 (emergency ventilation) and #10 and #11 (generator run). Remove the factory-installed jumpers before making the connections.
FIGURE 19 LC6000-200 Series Connection for Emergency Off, Emergency Ventilation and Generator Run (If Applicable)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Generator Run*
Emergency Ventilation*
Emergency Off*
* Normally closed (NC) contacts required. By default: Closed = No Alarm Open = Alarm

Manual 2100-750E Page 24 of 45

Communication Wiring
Connect the field-supplied communication wiring from the wall-mount units to the controller in the manner shown in Figures 20, 21 or 22. The daisy chain does not need to follow the addressing order. The communication wire should be 2-wire, 18 gauge shielded cable with drain. Any color can be used. Be sure to match "+" and "-" symbols on controller terminal blocks to prewired unit control terminal block (see Figures 24 and 25 on pages 28 and 29). Attach communication wire filters as shown in Figures 20, 21 or 22. Do not run communication wiring in same conduit as supply wiring. Route communication wiring and power supply wiring in their own separate conduits.
FIGURE 20 Communication Wiring (Daisy Chain Method)

Filter

Wall-Mount Unit

Filter LC6000 Controller

In addition to the "daisy chain" method of connecting the field-supplied communication wiring shown in Figure 20, the wall-mount units can also be connected in the manner shown in Figure 21. If connecting wall-units this way, be sure to place the communication wire filters in the positions shown in Figure 21. See Figure 22 on page 26 for more information on the correct placement of the communication wire filters depending on the wiring method used.

Wall-Mount Unit

FIGURE 21 Communication Wiring (Alternate Method)

LC6000 Controller

Filter

Wall-Mount Unit

Manual 2100-750E

Page

25 of 45

FIGURE 22 Placement of Communication Wire Filters (Daisy Chain and Alternate Methods)

Place filter here

Daisy Chain Wiring

Place filter here (end unit)

LC6000
Place filter here (end unit)

Unit 1

Unit 2

Alternate Wiring

Unit 3

Unit 4...up to 14 units

Place filter here (end unit)

Unit 1

Unit 2

LC6000*

Unit 3

Unit 4...up to 14 units

* LC6000 can be in any position other than start and end with filters placed on end units.

NOTE: Line filters can be on either the unit or controller, whichever device is on the end of the chain. No matter how many units there are, the two end devices will only have ONE communication cable, whereas the center devices will all have TWO (as shown above). Maximum two wires in each terminal. Filters go inside the unit or controller; shown out of unit above for identification only.

Manual 2100-750E Page 26 of 45

The steps outlined on the following pages show how to connect the field-supplied communication wiring using the daisy chain method shown in Figure 20. If using the alternate method (as shown in Figure 21), the connections to the controller and each wall-mount unit will be the same but the filters need to be placed in the positions shown in Figure 22.
FIGURE 23 Communication Wiring: Termination at the Controller
1. Using the field-provided shielded cable, make a small service loop after entering the controller and attach the provided EMI filter at the intersection of the loop.

2. Connect one wire to terminal #56 (negative), the other wire to terminal #57 (positive) and the drain wire to ground terminal #60.

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4142 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
+- + G

62 61 64 6

To Wall-Mount Unit 1 Control Board Terminal Block

Manual 2100-750E

Page

27 of 45

FIGURE 24 Communication Wiring: Termination at the First Wall-Mount Unit

Wall-Mount Unit 1
1. From the controller, extend the field-supplied shielded cable through a separate conduit and route to terminal #1 (positive) and terminal #2 (negative) on the upper terminal block next to the wall-mount control board on the unit control panel.
These connections are polarity-sensitive. Two-wire communication from control board is prewired to terminal block. Make sure to match "+" and "-" symbols on the Field Wiring label above the terminal block.

2. Connect the wires matching the terminal designations (+/-) of the Field Wiring label. Leave the drain wire loose.

Unit 1 Terminal Block

From LC6000 Controller

+ +

3. Connect another cable in a similar fashion ("daisy chain") to route in conduit to the second wall-mount unit. Connect both drain wires with wire nut. Maximum two wires per terminal.
Manual 2100-750E Page 28 of 45

To Wall-Mount Unit 2 From LC6000 Controller
Unit 1 Terminal Block

FIGURE 25 Communication Wiring: Termination at Additional Wall-Mount Units
From Wall-Mount Unit 1

Unit 2 14 Terminal Block

1. Route the cable from the first wall-mount unit to the terminal block of the second wall-mount unit. If this is the last unit to be connected, make a small service loop and attach EMI filter as shown.

Wall-Mount Unit 2

2. Connect the wires matching the terminal designations (+/-) on the Field Wiring label above the terminal block. Cap the loose drain with a wire nut or electrical tape.

From Wall-Mount Unit 1
Unit 2 14 Terminal Block

3. Continue daisy chaining units by connecting "+" to "+", "-" to "-" and wire nutting drain together until last unit which is capped with a wire nut. Attach EMI filter as shown above at last unit. Up to 14 wall-mount units can be connected and controlled by one LC6000 controller.
NOTE: Terminals #3 and #4 are dry contacts to be used for the unit disable option.
WARNING: Do not apply voltage to daisy chain connection terminals #1 or #2 or terminals #3 or #4. If 24V or any voltage is applied to these terminals or to the daisy chain connection, board damage may occur.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

29 of 45

Supply Wiring The LC6000 controller is powered by 120, 208 or 230 volts from the shelter. Field-supplied supply wiring should be minimum 16 gauge, maximum 14 gauge (see Figure 26). A reliable earth ground must be connected in addition to any grounding from conduit. Grounding bolts and nuts are included with the controller for this purpose; a 2 hole grounding lug must be field supplied. Install as shown in Figure 27. Failing to ground the controller box properly could result in damage to the equipment.
FIGURE 26 LC6000 Controller Circuit Install

Power

4 5 Input6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Ground

120 VAC Input (L1)

208V VAC Input (L1)

230V VAC Input (L1)

Power Input Common (L2 or N)

FIGURE 27 Controller Grounding Posts

A field-supplied, reliable earth ground must be connected in addition to any grounding from conduit. Attach earth ground to side of controller box using bolts and nuts supplied with controller and fieldsupplied 2-hole grounding lug. Failing to ground the controller box properly could result in damage to the equipment.

Manual 2100-750E Page 30 of 45

TABLE 3 LC6000-200 Terminal Block Index

TB#

Wire Mark

Description

- 120 VAC Input

- 208 VAC Input

- 230 VAC Input

- Power Input Common

- Power Input Ground

6 DI1 Emergency Off Input

7 GND Emergency Off Common

DI2 Emergency Vent Input

9 GND Emergency Vent Common

10 DI3 Generator Run Input

11 GND Generator Run Common

12 B2 Zone 1 Indoor Remote Humidity Sensor

13 GND Ground

14 B3 Zone 2 Indoor Remote Humidity Sensor

15 GND Ground

16 B4 Zone 3 Indoor Remote Humidity Sensor

17 GND Ground

18 B6 Zone 1 Indoor Temperature Sensor

19 GND Ground

20 B7 Zone 1 Indoor Remote Temperature Sensor

21 GND Ground

22 VDC+ Power for B2 (Z1 Humidity)

23 VDC+ Power for B3 (Z2 Humidity)

24 VDC+ Power for B4 (Z3 Humidity)

25 VDC+ Power for B10 (Pressure)

26 B8 Zone 2 Indoor Remote Temperature Sensor

27 GND Ground

28 B9 Zone 3 Indoor Remote Temperature Sensor

29 GND Ground

30 B10 Indoor Space Pressure

31 GND Ground

32 NO1 Humidifier 1

33 C1 Common

34 NO2 Humidifier 2

35 C1 Common

36 NO3 Humidifier 3

37 C1 Common

38 NO4 Emergency Off Alarm

TB#

Wire Mark

Description

39 C4 Common

40 NO5 Emergency Vent Alarm

41 C4 Common

42 NO6 Generator Run Alarm

43 C4 Common

44 NO7 Indoor Humidity Alarm

45 C7 Common

46 NO8 High Indoor Temperature Alarm

47 C8 Common

48 NO9 Low Indoor Temperature Alarm

49 C8 Common

50 NO10 Zone 1 Unit Alarm

51 C8 Common

52 NO11 Zone 2 Unit Alarm

53 C8 Common

54 NO12 Zone 3 Unit Alarm

55 C8 Common

FB1R-

RS485 RX- / TX- (Fieldbus 1) UNIT CONNECTION

FB1R+

RS485 RX+ / TX- (Fieldbus 1) UNIT CONNECTION

58 FB2R- RS485 RX- / TX- (Fieldbus 2)

59 FB2R+ RS485 RX+ / TX- (Fieldbus 2)

-- Power Input Ground

61 24 VAC+ 24 VAC Supply

-- Not Used

63 24 VAC+ 24 VAC Supply

64 24 VAC- 24 VAC Ground

65 24 VAC+ 24 VAC Supply for Outdoor Humidity Sensor

66 24 VAC- 24 VAC Ground for Outdoor Humidity Sensor

67 B11 Signal for Outdoor Humidity Sensor

68 24 VAC+ 24 VAC Supply

69 D14 Bard Guard Alarm Signal

70 B12 Signal for Outdoor Temperature Sensor

71 GND Ground for Outdoor Temperature Sensor

72 GND Ground for Bard Guard Alarm Signal

G Orange Power Connector

74 24 VAC+ 24 VAC Supply

75 G0 Orange Power Connector

76 24 VAC- 24 VAC Ground

Manual 2100-750E

Page

31 of 45

FIGURE 28 LC6000-200 Wiring Diagram

74 73 76 75

LC6000 TERMINAL BLOCK

(L1) 12012V0VININ (L1) 20820V8VININ (L1) 23023V0VININ (L2 OR N) COMCOMMOMNONININ
POWER GGNNDD
EMER OFF JUMPER
EMER VENT JUMPER GEN JUMPER
UNIT MODBUS CONNECTORS
GROUND

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

WHITE

RED

ORANGE

BLACK GREEN

RED

DI1

RED

DI2

RED

DI3

RED

TB 6 TB 8 TB 10
TB 69

RED

GREEN

BLK/RED

RED

GND +Vdc

TB 12 TB 14 TB 16
TB 18 TB 20

GND

RED GREEN BLUE/BLK

B10 NO1

BLUE/BLK NO2

BLUE/BLK BLACK BLUE/BLK

NO3 C1 NO4

BLUE/BLK NO5

TB 26 TB 28 TB 30 TB 67
TB 70

BLUE/BLK BLACK BLUE/BLK BLACK BLUE/BLK

NO6 C4 NO7 C7 NO8

GND

BLUE/BLK NO9

BLUE/BLK NO10

BLUE/BLK NO11

BLUE/BLK NO12

BLACK

ORANGE/BLK 1-RX-TX-

ORANGE BROWN/BLK

1-RX+TX+ 2-RX-TX-

BROWN

2-RX+TX+

GROUND

EMPTY YELLOW BLUE

G 24 VAC TB74 G0 24 VAC TB76

RED

B11

RED

B12

RED

DI4

GREEN

TB 61 TB 64

YELLOW G YELLOW BLUE G0 BLUE

120V/208V/230VAC TRANSFORMER
24VAC

YELLOW BLUE

TB74 TB76

G G0
24VAC INPUT
TO BOARD

R X-TX-
R X+ TX+ GND R X-TX-
R X+TX+ GND

TB 59 TB 58
TB 57 TB 56

TB 37 TB 32
TB 34 TB 36

TB 43

TB 38

TB 40

TB 42

PLC BOARD

TB 44 TB 45
TB 55 TB 46 TB 48 TB 50 TB 52 TB 54

NOTE:
Wire indexes are identified such that even numbered index numbers are on the lower wire entries of the terminal block and odd numbered index numbers are on the top wire entries. Since terminal block 60 is a ground block, terminal blocks 61 thru 72 shift while still maintaining the same top and bottom configuration.

62 61 64 63 66 65 68 67 70 69 72 71

Manual 2100-750E Page 32 of 45

SYSTEM SET UP

NOTE: Screenshots shown in this manual reflect default settings (when applicable).
The LC6000 controller and TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool will both be used to set up the Bard free cooling system (the TEC-EYE is only used to set up the wall-mount units). If installing a single MEGATEC wall-mount unit with a PGD or PGDx stand-alone display, refer to PGD manual 2100-734 or PGDx manual 2100-740 for information on setting up a stand-alone display for single unit operation.
TABLE 4 LC6000/TEC-EYE Passwords (Defaults)

User

2000

Technician

1313

Engineer

9254

Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter password

Main Menu. The menus permit the user to easily view, control and configure the unit. See the latest version of MEGA-TEC Service Manual 2100-749 for more information on using the TEC-EYE.
The TEC-EYE connects to the wall-mount unit control board via an RJ11 modular connector as shown in Figure 29.
When not being used, the TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool should be stored inside or near the LC6000 controller. Do not let the TEC-EYE leave the shelter.
FIGURE 29 TEC-EYE Connection to Unit Control

TEC-EYE Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool
The microprocessor control used in the MEGA-TEC wall-mount air conditioners allows for complete control and monitoring through the use of the provided TECEYE hand-held monitor.
The menu driven interface provides users the ability to scroll through two menu levels: Quick Menu and

Modular Connector for TEC-EYE Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool

FIGURE 30 TEC-EYE (Bard P/N 8301-059) Display and Interface (Status Screen Shown)

MIS-3953

ALARM KEY

UP KEY

MENU KEY

ENTER KEY

ESCAPE KEY
ALARM KEY Allows viewing of active alarms Silences audible alarms Resets active alarms MENU KEY Allows entry to Main Menu ESCAPE KEY Returns to previous menu level Cancels a changed entry

DOWN KEY

QUICK MENU UP KEY Steps to next screen in the display menu Changes (increases) the value of a modifiable field
ENTER KEY Accepts current value of a modifiable field Advances cursor
DOWN KEY Steps back to previous screen in the display menu Changes (decreases) the value of a modifiable field

Manual 2100-750E

Page

33 of 45

TEC-EYE Status Screen
The Status screen is the default start-up screen and also the return screen after 5 minutes of no activity. The screen can be accessed any time by pressing the ESCAPE key repeatedly.
The wall-mount unit address is displayed in the upper right corner on the Status screen (see Figure 30). The Status screen also shows the current date, time, return air temperature, mixed air temperature, supply air temperature, outdoor air temperature and outdoor air humidity. Blower speed, condenser fan speed, damper position and unit status are also displayed. See Table 5 on page 41 for wall-mount unit status messages.

NOTICE
It is important to check the software version during installation to ensure that the latest version has been installed. Current software versions and installation instructions are available on the Bard website at http://www. bardhvac.com/software-download/
Setting Up Wall-Mount Units for Operation
The TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool is needed to set up the wall-mount unit(s).
1. Address Each Wall-Mount Unit
Each unit must have a unique address for the system to operate correctly with the LC controller (Ex: 1, 2, 3, ...14 depending on the number of units). The unit only needs the address to be changed for the communication to work properly. The wall-mount unit address is displayed in the upper right corner on the Status screen on the TEC-EYE display (see Figure 30).
To change the unit address:
1) Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press ENTER key to scroll to Unit Address (see Figure 31).
5) Press UP or DOWN keys to change the address to a value between 1 and 14.

In addition to setting up the address, the user may also want to set the unit zone and unit of measure.
To change these settings:
1) Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press ENTER key to scroll to Unit Zone (see Figure 31).
5) If desired, press UP or DOWN keys to change value to desired zone.
6) Press ENTER scroll to UOM.
7) If desired, press UP or DOWN keys to change the value from USA to SI, NC, LON, CAN or UK. Units are preconfigured for each selection.
8) Press ENTER key to save.
Basic wall unit parameter settings are now set and the unit is ready to communicate with the LC.
2. Execute a Self Test on Each Unit
Execute a self test on each unit to verify the equipment is functioning correctly. The self test parameters are not adjustable.
The self test will automatically skip sections of the test based on the model number entered into the controller. If position 10 of the model number is a "B" ("B" indicates a blank off economizer option), the test steps associated with the economizer will be skipped. If positions 8 and 9 of the model number are "0Z" (0 kW) option, test steps associated with heating will be skipped. If

Manual 2100-750E Page 34 of 45

positions 8 and 9 are "09" (9 kW) option, second stage heat tests will be skipped.
1) Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Self Test A11 screen.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable parameter (see Figure 32).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to Yes. The self test will begin.
FIGURE 32 Executing Self Test

3. Clear Unit Alarm Logs on Each Unit
The wall-mount unit may have generated some alarms during startup and should be cleared after installation.
To clear the wall-mount unit alarm logs:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter TECHNICIAN password 1313.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
6) Press ENTER key to scroll to Delete alarm logs? (see Figure 33).
7) Press UP or DOWN key to change NO to YES.
8) Press ENTER key to clear all alarm logs.
FIGURE 33 Clearing Unit Alarm Logs

Self Test Parameter Descriptions Damper Time: This is the time (in seconds) allowed for both the opening sequence and closing sequence. Heat/Cool Time: This is the time (in seconds) allowed for cooling sequence and heating sequence. Status: This will display what the unit is doing as the self test progresses. The following messages may appear: Self Test Off Initializing... Opening Damper Closing Damper Compressor 1 On Compressor 1 & 2 On C1 Full Load + C2 On Turning Comp. Off.... Electric Heat 1 On Electric Heat 1 & 2 On Turning Heat Off... End The unit will determine which items to test based on the unit model number.

After each of the wall-mount units have been addressed, had a self test performed and had the alarm logs cleared, the rest of the system set up can proceed.
Setting Up LC6000 for Operation
The LC6000 controller will be used for the remaining steps in the set up process.
LC6000 Status Screen
The Status screen is the default start-up screen and also the return screen after 5 minutes of no activity on the LC6000. The screen can be accessed any time by pressing the ESCAPE key repeatedly.
The Status screen on the LC6000 displays the current date, time, unit displayed, zones and system status (see Figure 34 on page 36).

Manual 2100-750E

Page

35 of 45

FIGURE 34 LC6000 Controller Display and Interface (Status Screen Shown)

ALARM KEY MENU KEY ESCAPE KEY

UP KEY ENTER KEY DOWN KEY

QUICK MENU LC6000 interface key functions are the same as those shown for the TEC-EYE in Figure 30 on page 33.

4. Set LC Controller Date and Time
1) Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 1313.
3) Press the UP or DOWN keys to scroll to the Settings menu; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Date/Time menu; press ENTER key.
5) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Date/Time change.
6) Press ENTER key to scroll to the desired value to be changed (see Figure 35).
7) Press UP or DOWN keys to change the value.
8) Press ENTER key to save and to scroll to top of screen.
9) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Timezone (if applicable). Follow steps 6-8 to change timezone.
10) Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
FIGURE 35 Setting Controller Date and Time

NOTE: The LC6000 will sync the time and date configured to each of the wall-mount units once communication is established.
5. Configure Sensors
The system will need to be configured for the number of temperature and humidity sensors installed. The system is shipped with one combination temperature and humidity sensor. Additional combination sensors may be purchased or alternatively, temperature-only sensors may be purchased instead. The LC is capable of supporting up to four indoor temperature sensors (two in zone 1, one in zone 2 and one in zone 3), three indoor humidity sensors (one per zone ), one outdoor temperature sensor and one outdoor humidity sensor. The system will need to be configured for the various configurations.
If necessary, the sensors could be calibrated at this time too. For information on calibrating the sensors (adjusting the offset), see page 42.
To enable/disable Zone 1 Indoor Humidity:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z1 Indoor Hum C4.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 36).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).

Manual 2100-750E Page 36 of 45

FIGURE 36 Enable/Disable Zone 1 Indoor Humidity Sensor

5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 38).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 38 Enable/Disable Zone 3 Indoor Humidity Sensor

To enable/disable Zone 2 Indoor Humidity:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z2 Indoor Hum C5.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 37).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 37 Enable/Disable Zone 2 Indoor Humidity Sensor

To enable/disable Zone 1 Indoor Temperature:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z1 Indoor Temp C7.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 39).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 39 Enable/Disable Zone 1 Indoor Temperature Sensor

To enable/disable Zone 3 Indoor Humidity:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z3 Indoor Hum C6.

To enable/disable Zone 1 Remote Temperature:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

37 of 45

2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z1 Remote Temp C8.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 40).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 40 Enable/Disable Zone 1 Remote Temperature Sensor

To enable/disable Zone 3 Remote Temperature:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z3 Remote Temp C10.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 42).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 42 Enable/Disable Zone 3 Remote Temperature Sensor

To enable/disable Zone 2 Remote Temperature:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Z2 Remote Temp C9.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 41).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 41 Enable/Disable Zone 2 Remote Temperature Sensor

To enable/disable Outdoor Air Humidity:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Outdoor Air Humid C11.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see Figure 43).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).

Manual 2100-750E Page 38 of 45

FIGURE 43 Enable/Disable Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor

5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Total Units (see Figure 45).
6) Press UP or DOWN keys to adjust value to correct number of units.
7) Press ENTER key to save value. 8) Press the ESCAPE key several times to return
to Main Menu screen.
FIGURE 45 Total Units Displayed

To enable/disable Outdoor Air Temperature: 1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu
screen. 2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to
enter USER password 2000. 3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to IO Config;
press ENTER key. 4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Outdoor
Air Temp C12. 5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable (see
Figure 44). 6) Press UP or DOWN key to change value to ON
to enable sensor (or change value to OFF to disable sensor).
FIGURE 44 Enable/Disable Outdoor Air Temperature
6. Enter Total Number of Units 1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen. 2) Press UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000. 3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key. 4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to General; press enter key.

7. Verify Units Are Online

Once a unit is uniquely addressed, communication can be verified at the LC controller.

With the correct number of units set at the LC controller, each unit can be remotely viewed from the controller information screen.

To view these screens:

1) Press ESCAPE key to view the Status screen. (May need to be pressed more than once.)

2) Press UP or DOWN key until the Quick Menu in

the lower right corner of the screen displays the

Information icon (

); press ENTER key.

3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll through the Information screens until the desired unit Information screen appears.

In addition to being able to remotely view the units, an alarm will be generated on the LC controller for units not communicating.

8. Select Economizer Type for Each Zone

Each zone can be configured to operate the economizers with different considerations. For more information on the different economizer choices, reference the most recent version of MEGA-TEC Service Instructions 2100-749.

The type of consideration can be set to none, dry bulb, temperature and humidity or enthalpy. These settings will be communicated to the wall units while connected to the LC6000 to ensure all units operate the same.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

39 of 45

To select economizer type for each zone:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter password 1313.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3; press ENTER key.
5) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Zone FC Settings A2-4 (Zone 1), Zone FC Settings A3-4 (Zone 2) or Zone FC Settings A4-4 (Zone 3).
6) Press ENTER key to scroll to Type (see Figure 46).
7) Press UP or DOWN keys to change economizer type to None, Drybulb, TempHum or Enthalpy.
8) Press ENTER key to save.
FIGURE 46 Selecting Economizer Type

FIGURE 47 Clearing LC6000 Alarm Logs
10. Complete Installation Once all the installation steps have been completed, all alarms and alarm logs have been cleared and system verification and self test results were satisfactory, the installation can now be considered "complete". Additional programming information can be found in MEGA-TEC Service Instructions 2100-749 and LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669.

9. Clear Controller Alarm Logs
The LC6000 may have generated some alarms during startup and should be cleared after installation. Controller alarm logs must be cleared at time of installation.
To clear the LC controller alarm logs:
1) Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2) Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4) Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5) Press ENTER key to scroll to Delete alarm logs? (see Figure 47).
6) Press UP or DOWN key to value to YES; press ENTER key.
7) Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
Manual 2100-750E Page 40 of 45

Menu Screens and Password Levels
TABLE 5 TEC-EYE Menu Structure

Password Level Required
None None None
User Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician Technician
User User
-Technician Technician
Varies --

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

TABLE 6 LC6000 Controller Menu Structure

Menu/Screen Structure
Quick Menu Setpoints (Comfort Mode) Information
System Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3...14 Alarm Log
Main Menu System Config Adv. Sys. Config I/O Config On/Off Alarm Logs Settings
Date/Time Language Network Config Serial Config Initialization Logout

Password Level Required
None None None None None None None
User Technician Technician
User User
-Technician
User Technician Technician
Varies --

Manual 2100-750E

Page

41 of 45

Setpoints
The LC6000 setpoints will determine the cooling and heating setpoints when communicating with the wallmount units. The unit cooling and heating setpoints will determine the cooling and heating setpoints when in orphan mode. It is important to note that once the wall-mount unit establishes communication with the LC6000, the setpoints from the LC will override the wall-mount unit setpoints. If a unit returns to orphan mode after communicating with LC, it will operate with last communicated setpoints from the LC. If at any time the unit(s) loses communication with the LC6000 controller, the unit(s) will go into orphan mode.
Calibrating Sensors
1. Press MENU key on LC controller interface to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 2000.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to sensor to be adjusted.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Offset (see Figure 48).
6. Press UP or DOWN keys to add or subtract to the sensor offset value.
7. Press ENTER key to save. FIGURE 48
Adjusting Sensor Offset Value
Manual 2100-750E Page 42 of 45

TABLE 7 Unit Status Messages

Message

Description

Orphan Mode

LC Online
Cont. Blower
Comfort Mode Freecooling
Passive Dehum Cooling Heating
Optimized

Active Dehum

Self Test

This message will be shown when the self test has been activated and component operations are being verified.

Off by Alarm

Emergency Vent
Emergency Cool
Emergency Off Off by LC
Off by PGDx Off by Keyboard
Model Invalid

This message will be shown when connected to a LC6000 and the emergency vent input is activated.
This message will be shown when the space temperature is above the high temperature setpoint. This can be active in orphan mode, stand-alone mode or when connected to the LC6000.
This message will be shown when unit disable input is active, or when connected to LC6000 and emergency off input is active.
This message will be shown when connected to the LC6000 and the system is turned off.
This message will be shown when connected to the stand-alone display and the unit is turned off.
This message will be shown when unit has been turned off at unit.
This message will be shown when a valid model number is not entered into the controller.

Manual 2100-750E

Page

43 of 45

TABLE 8 LC6000 Status Messages

Message

Description

The LC6000 is ready and functioning properly.

The LC6000 is being turned off by the Off by BMS Building Management System through
Modbus TCP/IP.

Off by Keyboard

The LC6000 is turned off using the (D. On/Off) Menu on the PGD. All communicating units will be inactive.

Comfort Mode

The LC6000 is set to Comfort Mode. This mode is used to temporarily override heating/cooling setpoints and maintain a default temperature of 72°F for 60 minutes.

Emergency Cooling

A high temperature has been sensed in one or more zones. All available units in that zone are sent a command for emergency cooling. (Refer to unit manual for emergency cooling sequence.)

Emergency Vent

Input signal from an external device at terminal DI2 (e.g., hydrogen detector). Units that are equipped with a ventilation option and configured will open the dampers at 100% with the blower at full speed.

A/C Circuit Information
MEGA-TEC Series wall-mounted air conditioners have two separate refrigeration circuits: Circuit 1 is the two stage system located on the left side of the unit and circuit 2 is the single stage system on the right side (see Figure 49).
For more information on the W180 MEGA-TEC dual A/C circuits, see the latest version of Service Instructions 2100-749.

FIGURE 49 MEGA-TEC Refrigeration Circuits

CIRCUIT 1
LEFT HAND

CIRCUIT 2
RIGHT HAND

Manual 2100-750E Page 44 of 45

FRONT VIEW

MIS-4034 A

Remote Indoor Temperature/Humidity Sensor Orientation
Current versions of the remote indoor temperature/ humidity sensor need to be installed with the shielded cable wires entering the bottom of the back of the sensor to connect to the sensor terminals (see Figure 50). Earlier versions of this sensor were installed so that the sensor wires entered through the top of the back of the sensor (see Figure 51). The orientation of the sensor affects the position of the DP1/DP2 jumpers. Depending on how the sensor is installed, be sure to confirm that the jumpers are in the proper position for the 0-1 V setting as shown in the figures below.
This applies to all indoor temperature/humidity sensors connected to the LC controller. See illustration mounted inside of sensor cover for further detail on jumper position.
FIGURE 50 Current Sensor Orientation (Shielded Cable Wires Enter from Bottom)

FIGURE 51 Earlier Sensor Orientation (Shielded Cable Wires Enter from Top)

Jumper
DP1 DP2
DP1 and DP2 Jumpers Positioned for 0-1V (Current Orientation)

Jumper
DP1 DP2
DP1 and DP2 Jumpers Positioned for 0-1V (Earlier Orientation)

Manual 2100-750E

Page

45 of 45

Limited Warranty
For units applied within the United States, Puerto Rico, US Virgin Islands, Guam, Canada and Mexico

Limited Warranty To Original Purchaser: Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506 warrants to you, the original purchaser, that your Bard product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship when used under normal conditions from the installation date through the time periods outlined in the "Duration of Warranty" section (see reverse side).
Proof Of Purchase: You must be able to show us the date on which you purchased your product when you make a claim under this warranty. Your owner's registration card filed online at www.wallmountwarranty.com or your contractor's invoice, bill of sale, or similar document is sufficient at time of warranty claim. If you can not show us the actual date of purchase, the time periods in this warranty will start on the date that we shipped your Bard product from our factory.
What This Warranty Does Not Cover: (Also see Duration of Warranty on reverse side.) This warranty does not cover defects or damage caused by:
1. Alterations not approved by us; improper installation (including over or under sizing), improper repairs, or servicing; or improper parts and accessories not supplied by us.
2. Misuse or failure to follow installation and operating instructions (including failure to perform preventative maintenance) or limitations on the rating plate. This includes failure to use low ambient controls on all applications requiring compressor operation in cooling mode below 60F outdoor ambient.
3. Any corrosion from operation in a corrosive atmosphere (examples: acids, halogenated hydrocarbons or environmental conditions). 4. Parts that must be replaced periodically (such as filters, mist eliminators, ERV belts, pile seals, etc.). 5. Improper fuel or electrical supply (such as low voltage, voltage transients, power interruption, and units on generators with no brownout protection). 6. Accidents or other events beyond our reasonable control (such as storm, fire, or transportation damage). 7. Defects that happen after
(a) Anyone has tampered with the product. (b) The product has been improperly serviced according to accepted trade practices; (c) The product has been moved from its original place of installation; or, (d) The product has been damaged by an event beyond Bard's control (See also No. 5 above). 8. Consequential damages (such as increased living expenses while the product is being repaired). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. This warranty has certain limitations for units installed on over-the-road trucks, vans and trailers. (See reverse side.) 10. Cost of service call at installation site to diagnose causes of trouble, labor to replace defective component or transportation costs for replacement parts. 11. This Limited Warranty does not apply to products installed or operated outside of the US, Puerto Rico, US Virgin Islands, Guam, Canada and Mexico. Units operated in coastal areas where the operating environment is exposed to airborne saline particles (typically 5 miles from coast line) must have corrosion protection or warranty claims will be declined on corrosion-based cabinet and part failures. 12. Bard does not endorse, approve or certify any online sales of its products through auction websites, online retailers, liquidators or any other method of online sales direct to consumers. Bard will not honor the factory warranty of any Bard equipment purchased over the Internet.
Your Responsibilities: You are responsible for
1. Preventative maintenance of the product (such as cleaning coils and replacement of filters, nozzles and other consumable parts). 2. Ensuring that the instruction manual is followed for care and use of your product. 3. Ensuring that your product is installed by a competent, qualified contractor, following all local and national codes, and industry standards.
What We Will Do About A Defect: We will either repair or replace the defective part only. Replacement parts may be reconditioned parts. The warranty for the repaired or replaced part will last only for the remainder of the warranty period for the original part.
Defective parts and a properly completed Bard parts warranty form must be returned to a Bard distributor for submitting to Bard to be eligible for a warranty credit or replacement. Credits are issued to the Bard distributor.
We will not pay or be responsible for labor or defective/replacement part transportation costs or delays in repairing or failures to complete repairs caused by events beyond our reasonable control.
What You Must Do 1. Tell your heating and air conditioning contractor as soon as you discover a problem and have the contractor make repairs. 2. Pay for all transportation, related service labor, diagnostic charges, refrigerant, refrigerant recovery and related items.
Service If your product requires service, you should contact the contractor who installed it or the contractor that has been providing the product's preventative maintenance and repair service. You may find the installing contractor's name on the product or in your Owner's packet. If you do not know who that is, you should contact a competent, qualified contractor to make the repairs. If in doubt, you should contact the nearest distributor that handles Bard products (www.bardhvac.com). Please note that contractors and distributors that handle Bard products are independent contractors and distributors, and therefore, are not under the direction of Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Only Warranty This is the only warranty that we make. There are no other express warranties. All implied warranties are limited in duration to the duration of the applicable written warranty made above.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
Other Rights This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state.

BARD MANUFACTURING CO., INC. -- BRYAN, OHIO 43506
Dependable quality equipment . . . since 1914

Form No. 7960-420

Issued:

03/07/22

Supersedes: 11/18/21

Duration Of Warranty is limited to defects arising during the periods shown in the following table:

Model Number Series:
Includes all Models in each Series and which may have additional characters. (Example: W12-72A includes W36A w/additional characters.)

-- Number of Years from Installation Date --

Compressor

Sealed System Components

All Other Functional Parts

Heat Exchangers

AIR CONDITIONERS

W12A, W18A, W24A, W30A, W36A, W42A, W48A, W60A, W72A, W090A, W120A, W150,

W180A, W18L, W24L, W30L, W36L, W3SA, W4SA, W5SA, Q36A, Q42A, Q48A, I30A, I36A,

I42A, I48A, I60A

N/A

AIR SOURCE HEAT PUMPS

W18H, W24H, W30H, W36H, W42H, W48H, W60H, C24H, C30H, C36H, C42H, C48H, C60H,

T24H, T30H, T36H, T42H, T48H, T60H, T24S, T30S, T36S, T42S, T48S, T60S, Q24H,

Q30H, Q36H, Q43H, Q48H, I30H, I36H, I42H, I48H, I60H, I36Z, I48Z, I60Z

N/A

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL UNITS W6RV, W6LV

N/A

EQUIPMENT SHELTER UNITS MULTI-TEC, MEGA-TEC, FUSION-TEC

N/A

GEOTHERMAL/WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS QW2S, QW3S, QW4S, QW5S

N/A

CHILLED WATER QC50 (No Compressor)

N/A

GAS/ELECTRIC WALL-MOUNT W24G, W30G, W36G, W42G, W48G, W60G, WG3S, WG4S, WG5S

ACCESSORIES
Factory/Field Installed Bard Ventilation and Heater Packages Bard branded Thermostats/Temperature Controllers, UV-C LED Light Kits LC6000, LV1000, MC4002, DC3003, TEC40, BG1000, PGD, PGDX, MC5300, MC5600 Humidistats, C02 Controllers and all other field-installed accessories not listed separately

N/A

For equipment that does not have an online warranty registration, the warranty period starts when the product was shipped from the factory.
Heat transfer coils (refrigerant to air coils for air source and coaxial coils for water source units) are covered for leaks for 5 years. Physical damage to air side coils resulting in leaks or insufficient airflow, or fin deterioration due to corrosive atmosphere (such as acids, halogenated hydrocarbons, or coastal environmental conditions) are not covered. Leaks in coaxial coils due to freezing of the coils are not covered. Copper coaxial coils for QW are not warranted for ground water/open loop installations.
Functional parts warranty is 1 year for all telecommunication, electric switch stations, pump stations, and similar applications. This also applies to all OTR (over the road) applications.
All OTR (over the road) applications that are moved from one location to another: Factory Warranty applies up to the point of initial start-up and test at all OEM manufacturing locations or subsequent outfitting facility. Once it goes into OTR service, the warranty expires immediately for compressor and sealed system components. This OTR exemption does not apply to relocatable classrooms, construction, or office trailers.
Factory-coated coils have a "5" year warranty in corrosive environments that are listed as approved.

Internet Resources
Recognized as a leader in the HVAC industry, Bard combines quality products and outstanding service with innovation and technological advances to deliver highperformance heating and cooling products around the world. Please visit www.bardhvac.com for additional information regarding warranty and product information.

BARD MANUFACTURING CO., INC. -- 1914 Randolph Dr. -- BRYAN, OHIO 43506

Form No. Issued:

7960-420 03/07/22

Dependable quality equipment . . . since 1914

Supersedes: 11/18/21

Literature Assembly 911-0837-2
BOOK 2 OF 2

Contains the following:

2100-034(G) 2110-1466(G) 2100-710(A) 7960-788 7960-825(A) 7960-826(A)

User Guide Replacement Parts Manual Mega-Tec Quick Start Guide Commissioning Report Exporting Alarm Logs Exporting 7 Day I/O Logs

USER'S APPLICATION GUIDE AND TECHNICAL PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Manual:

2100-034G

Supersedes: 2100-034F

Date:

12-17-20

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506 www.bardhvac.com

BARDHVAC.COM

Climate Control Solutions

General Information
The User's Application Guide covers a wide range of heating and cooling products manufactured by Bard Manufacturing Company. It is intended to be a general guide for care and operation of typical systems and covers the most important features you should be aware of and are responsible for as the user of the equipment.
Because our product offerings are so varied and can be equipped with many features and options, it is not possible to cover all aspects of what your specific system may be configured for. Some systems may be quite simple in features to provide basic cooling and possibly heating, while other systems may also incorporate various ventilation technologies, dehumidification circuits and many different internal controls as well as room temperature controls. Therefore, you should request a detailed operation sequence and explanation of any special features from your installer and/or service company and also have them instruct you as to any routine maintenance procedures you are responsible for.

Contents
Overview......................................................................... 3 Documentation.............................................................. 4
Unit Literature Assembly Documentation Provided with Your Units......................................................4 Unit Installation............................................................5 WALL MOUNT Products Mounting the Product on Wall Surface..........................................................5 WALL MOUNT Products Clearances for Outdoor Condenser Fan Airflow............................................6 WALL MOUNT Products Clearances for Indoor Supply and Return Airflow.......................................6 WALL MOUNT Products Condensate and Defrost Drainage ...............................................................7 I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Installing the Product Inside a Room.......................................................8 I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Clearances for Outdoor Condenser Fan Airflow............................................8 I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Clearances for Indoor Supply and Return Airflow.......................................9
I-TEC Air Path.................................................9 Q-TEC Air Path................................................9 I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Condensate Drainage..10 All Products Power Supply Verification.................11 Field-Supplied Voltage...................................11 Single and Three Phase Power........................11 Hertz (Frequency)..........................................11 Unit Maintenance........................................................12 All Products Filters and Filter Servicing...............12 Outdoor Unit Wall Mount Room Air Filters........12 WALL MOUNT Products Filters and Filter Servicing.............................................................13 I-TEC Indoor Products Filters and Filter Servicing.............................................................14 Q-TEC Indoor Products Filters and Filter Servicing.............................................................15 All Products Coil Cleaning..................................16 Equipment Corrosion Protection......................16 All Products Condenser Airflow...........................17

Unit Operation.............................................................18 Air-to-Air Cooling Products (Air Conditioners)..........18 Air-to-Air Cooling and Heating Products (Heat Pumps)......................................................18 Cooling Mode................................................18 Heating Mode...............................................18 Water-to-Air Cooling and Heating Products (Geothermal Heat Pumps).....................................19 Cooling Mode................................................19 Heating Mode...............................................19 Water Supply Systems....................................19
Dehumidification and Ventilation Operation........20 Dehumidification (Air-to-Air or Water-to-Air Systems) .............................................................20 Ventilation Options (Air-to-Air or Water-to-Air Systems) .............................................................20
Troubleshooting.......................................................... 21 All Units Troubleshooting...................................21

Manual 2100-034G Page 2 of 21

Overview
The User's Application Guide and Technical Product Overview covers the following products:

WALL MOUNT Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps

I-TEC® Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps

Q-TECTM Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps

The User's Application Guide and Technical Product Overview covers the following topics:
· Documentation provided by Bard for proper use of your new product. · Unit installation guidelines. · Routine unit maintenance. · Unit operation. · Unit troubleshooting.

Please use this guide as a general overview regarding unit application, maintenance and troubleshooting. Refer to product installation instructions and supplemental documentation provided with the unit or go to www.bardhvac.com for detailed individual product information.

Overview

Manual 2100-034G

Page

3 of 21

Documentation
There are two sources of valuable information for your new Bard product: · Documentation provided with your unit, normally located inside the unit control panel during shipping. This
information should be saved once the unit is installed for future maintenance reference or to answer questions about equipment after installation. · Documentation provided on the internet at www.bardhvac.com. This may be accessed from a desktop computer at the office, a laptop or an internet-capable cell phone at the worksite. Up-to-date documentation is available, along with specification sheets and other valuable resources regarding your new Bard product.
Unit Literature Assembly Documentation Provided with Your Unit
Bard products are shipped with documentation that when used by a technician with cooling and heating knowledge, can ensure that your product is installed safely, performs optimally and achieves the longest life cycle possible. Shipped literature includes the following: · User Manual (this document) · Installation Instructions · Replacement Parts Manual · Wiring Diagrams · Warranty Information

Manual 2100-034G Page 4 of 21

Documentation

Unit Installation
Installation plays a key part in unit functionality, performance and safety. Product securing and placement, duct design and supply/return location, electrical routing and condensate and defrost drainage all play key roles in making sure a unit will perform per the design specifications.
WALL MOUNT Products Mounting the Product on a Wall Surface
Outdoor products are normally mounted to an exterior wall surface, including brick, cement block, metal or wood construction. These products are labeled as "WALL MOUNT" units. Before installation begins, the wall surface should be inspected by a construction professional to ensure it will support the weight of the unit and accessory items. Approximate weights are available from the product specification sheet, and a safety factor should be designed into the installation. Typical fasteners to attach the unit to the wall using the integrated mounting flanges on both sides of the unit include tap cons, bolts, studs and other fastening devices. The selection of the fasteners to be used needs to be reviewed by a construction professional and decided upon based on the wall construction and fastener strength required. It is important to follow all guidelines and procedures covered in the installation instructions manual provided for the product.

Built-In Mounting Flange Detail:
Outdoor WALL MOUNT products include a mounting flange that is part of the cabinet construction. Ø.375" holes are provided for unit mounting unless specified otherwise in installation instructions.

Specification Sheets: Unit specification sheets provided at www.bardhvac.com include basic unit weights and dimensions (see example below). Ventilation options and other accessories must be added into the total weight of the unit.
Specification Sheet Example

Unit Installation Wall Mount

Manual 2100-034G

Page

5 of 21

WALL MOUNT Products Clearances for Outdoor Condenser Fan Airflow
Unit placement and avoidance of obstructions outside the structure are very critical to unit performance. Avoid installing the unit in areas that will obstruct outdoor condenser fan airflow or create "pockets" of heated air being exhausted from the condenser coil. Solid construction fences should not be placed directly in front of the unit without provisions for condenser airflow. Solid exterior walls need to be spaced as far away from units as possible to avoid pockets of heated air causing condenser air recirculation.
Solid barriers located too close to the face or side surfaces (condenser fan inlet and outlet) of the WALL MOUNT can both impede airflow and force heated air to short circuit (be returned) from the condenser outlet to the condenser inlet. Either condition will effectively raise the condensing temperature and pressure reducing cooling capacity and efficiency. In extreme cases, the unit may fail to operate due to high refrigerant pressures inside the unit, and compressor and/or fan motor failure may occur. Clearances given in installation instructions ensure components can be serviced and maintenance can be performed when needed.
National and local electrical codes must be reviewed before unit installation.
Always use common sense when installing products, follow unit clearances given in the installation instructions and contact local Bard distributors when additional knowledge is needed regarding unit clearances for proper unit functionality.
WALL MOUNT Products Clearances for Indoor Supply and Return Airflow
The Bard unit should be placed in an area where the supply (leaving conditioned air) and return (unit air intake) air paths will be unrestricted. Avoid placing objects in the structure within 24" of the return (unit air intake) grille. Avoid placing objects directly in the path of the supply (conditioned) air grille. This will inhibit the "throw" of the supply air throughout the structure and reduce the cooling and/or heating ability of the unit; in extreme cases, this may cause evaporator coil freezing issues. Supply air must be able to freely circulate conditioned air throughout the structure. Adjustment of supply grille deflectors is often necessary to ensure proper room circulation.
Ducted applications should not exceed the rated duct static pressures given in the unit specification sheets. Special requirements for duct construction and distances to combustible materials need to be followed per the installation instructions when electric heating is used.

Manual 2100-034G Page 6 of 21

Unit Installation Wall Mount

WALL MOUNT Products Condensate and Defrost Drainage

Condensate drainage for air conditioning units needs to be planned before installation. Your new Bard WALL MOUNT product includes provisions to allow condensate water to exit the bottom of the unit. If condensate water is to be routed away from the unit, adequate drain sizing needs to be provided to allow proper drainage for condensate water generation. During normal air conditioning operation, large amounts of condensate water is generated inside the unit as moisture is extracted from the supply air. This is collected in an evaporator pan and drained to either a drainage system (indoor products) or outside the unit cabinet (outdoor products). Evaporator drain traps are not necessary for any of our wall mounted outdoor products, and the use of "standing water" U-shaped traps may be prone to freezing in certain climate zones.

Condensate Water Drainage:
Unit condensate water exits the base of the unit during cooling operation.

Defrost water drainage from heat pump units needs to be planned before installation. During seasons requiring heating operation, the unit will need to warm the condenser coil to remove frost build-up (defrost). Outdoor heat pump products include holes in the unit base under the condenser coil for proper water drainage when in the heating defrost cycle. Avoid placing the unit on a pad or blocking the base drainage holes under the condenser coil without proper allowances (6" recommended) for water drainage due to damage caused by freezing conditions. Without proper drainage, defrost water may freeze causing ice build up and damage the lower portion of the condenser coil.

Defrost Water Drainage:
Holes are provided in the front of the unit base for heat pump condensate water drainage.

Defrost Water Drainage:
6" clearance is recommended under WALL MOUNT Heat Pump products to allow proper defrost water drainage.

Unit Installation Wall Mount

Manual 2100-034G

Page

7 of 21

I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Installing the Product Inside a Room

Indoor products are normally supported by the floor surface and are adjacent to an interior wall surface, including brick, cement block, metal or wood construction. These products are normally labeled as "I-TEC" or "Q-TEC" units. Before installation begins, the floor surface should be inspected by a construction professional to ensure it will support the weight of the unit and accessory items. Approximate weights are available from the product specification sheet, and a safety factor should be designed into the installation.

I-TEC

A sheet metal sleeve is normally installed in the wall allowing vent and condenser fan air to enter and exit the unit. Different sleeve depths are available for installation into various wall depths. Typical fasteners to attach the sleeve to the outside surface of the wall include tap cons and other fastening devices. The I-TEC or Q-TEC unit is then slid up to the wall surface and connected to the sleeve using screws. Trim kits are available to enclose gaps between the wall surface and the unit. A louver grille is used to cover the external wall opening and fasteners used during sleeve installation.

Q-TEC
Wall Sleeve: Wall sleeves allow for outdoor air to enter and exit the unit inside the room.

Air Paths:
Air paths through the unit allow for cooling operation and fresh air to enter the structure (I-TEC shown).

Louver Installation:
Outdoor louvers provide an esthetically pleasing look to the installation and cover the unit opening (I-TEC shown).

I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Clearances for Outdoor Condenser Fan Airflow
Solid barriers located too close to the face of the outdoor louver of the I-TEC or Q-TEC can both impede airflow and force heated air to short circuit (be returned) from the condenser outlet to the condenser inlet. Either condition will effectively raise the condensing temperature and pressure reducing cooling capacity and efficiency. In extreme cases, the unit may fail to operate due to high refrigerant pressures inside the unit, and compressor and/or fan motor failure may occur. It is recommended to allow 15' (457.2 cm) in front of unit louver for proper condenser airflow. Always use common sense when installing products, follow unit clearances given in the installation instructions and contact local Bard distributors when additional knowledge is needed regarding unit clearances for proper unit functionality.

Manual 2100-034G Page 8 of 21

Unit Installation I-TEC and Q-TEC

I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Clearances for Indoor Supply and Return Airflow

The Bard unit should be placed in an area where the supply (leaving conditioned air) and return (unit air intake) air paths will be unrestricted. Avoid placing objects inside the room within 24" of the return (unit air intake) louvers or grille. Avoid placing objects directly in the path of the supply (conditioned) air grilles. This will inhibit the "throw" of the supply air throughout the structure and reduce the cooling and/or heating ability of the unit and in extreme cases may cause evaporator coil freezing issues. Ducted applications should not exceed the rated duct static pressures given in the unit specification sheets. Special requirements for duct construction and distances to combustible materials need to be followed per the unit installation instructions when electric heating is used.

I-TEC Air Path

The I-TEC product has been engineered for extremely quiet unit operation and has multiple air paths for air entering and exiting the unit. Room air enters the upper sides to be conditioned (cooled) inside the unit and exits the unit top. The unit will either be ducted to supply registers or have a supply air plenum box installed. A supply air plenum box allows quiet operation without ducting the air leaving the unit. Room air also enters the bottom of both front doors during ventilation operation.

Typical I-TEC Installation

Q-TEC Air Path

The Q-TEC product has been engineered for efficient, economical unit operation and has a mid-mounted front grille for air entering the unit. The unit will either be ducted to supply registers or have a supply air plenum box installed. A supply air plenum box allows quiet operation without ducting the air leaving the unit.

Cool conditioned air exits unit

Room air enters unit

Typical Q-TEC Installation
The I-TEC and Q-TEC product installation instructions contain additional information regarding unit air paths and required clearances. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Unit Installation I-TEC and Q-TEC

Manual 2100-034G

Page

9 of 21

I-TEC and Q-TEC Products Condensate Drainage
Condensate drainage for Bard indoor cooling units is a very important part of unit installation. During normal air conditioning operation, large amounts of condensate water are generated inside the unit as moisture is extracted from the supply air. This is collected in an evaporator pan and needs to be drained to an external drainage system. Your new Bard product includes provisions to allow condensate water to exit the unit and fittings will need to be field supplied to connect the unit drain to the building. Adequate drain sizing needs to be provided to allow proper drainage for condensate water generation and restriction in drain lines should be avoided. Evaporator drain traps are not necessary unless required by local codes.
Defrost water for heat pump operation and outdoor water entering the condenser area also needs to be drained out of the unit. The I-TEC product uses a combined defrost and outdoor water drainage system. The Q-TEC has a combined defrost and evaporator drain connection unless an optional in-wall drain box is used. Outdoor water exits the Q-TEC through the wall sleeve. Follow all instructions provided in the unit installation instructions regarding drain connections and sleeve installation to avoid water leakage inside the building or structure.
I-TEC Drain System: The I-TEC drainage system consists of a manifold drain kit that combines all drains behind the unit to allow connection to the building system.

Q-TEC Drain System:
The Q-TEC drainage system consists of a lower right side or lower right rear connection fitting. An optional in-wall drain box may also be purchased as an accessory that allows separate evaporator and defrost water drainage.

Lower Right Side Drain

Lower Right Rear Drain

Optional In-Wall Drain Box

Manual 2100-034G Page 10 of 21

Unit Installation I-TEC and Q-TEC

All Products Power Supply Verification
It is very important to follow all electrical and mechanical safety guidelines and instructions provided in the product installation instructions. Failure to do so may result in death, injury or product damage.
A proper power supply to your new Bard unit is very important. Be sure to verify the following with a multi-meter or other power measuring device before applying power to your Bard product.
Field-Supplied Voltage
Electrical voltage ratings and proper voltage operating ranges are provided in the unit specification sheets and installation instructions. It is important that power supplied to the unit stay in the specified operating voltage range. Voltage above or below the minimum operating value given could result in improper unit startup, unit shutdown, low unit performance, improper thermostat and unit controller operation, compressor damage and premature failure of functional parts. As a general guideline, it is always best if the power source for the unit supplies the nominal electrical rating value given in the specification sheets, installation instructions and unit serial plate for the product being used. To do so will provide the best unit performance possible from your new Bard product.
Single and Three Phase Power
Bard products are available in single and three phase power options. It is important to connect the proper phase listed on the unit serial plate. Three phase power is often used to reduce energy usage, and units rated for 3 phase operation are equipped with a phase monitor safety device. The phase monitor will not allow unit operation with improper phase connection and a red LED light on the monitor indicates phase wiring issues. Connecting 3 phase power to a single phase unit will result in component damage and improper unit operation. Connecting single phase power to a 3 phase unit will also result in component damage and improper unit operation.
Hertz (Frequency)
Bard products are available in 50hz and 60hz power options. It is important to connect power with the proper hz value listed on the unit serial plate. 60hz power is often used in the United States and Canada and units rated for 50hz operation are normally for international sales outside of this area. Connecting 50hz power to a 60hz unit not rated for 50hz operation may result in component damage and improper unit operation. Some equipment may be rated for 50/60hz operation. Review the unit specifications and installation instructions for further information regarding the power requirements of the unit.

The product installation instructions and unit specification sheets contain additional information regarding unit electrical data. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Unit Installation Electrical

Manual 2100-034G

Page

11 of 21

Unit Maintenance
All Products Filters and Filter Servicing
All Bard products contain air filters that must be cleaned or replaced on a regular basis. Keeping air filter(s) clean is the single most important responsibility of the user of the equipment. Each type of system must be equipped with an air filter(s) in the indoor circulating air system to clean the air, keep the system itself clean for peak efficiency and capacity and prolong the useful life of the equipment. DO NOT operate the system without the proper air filters. Filters should be inspected at least monthly and replaced or cleaned (depending on type) as needed. The useful life of an air filter can vary widely depending upon application and use of the equipment, and it is critical to monitor filter condition and establish an acceptable maintenance schedule. Failure to do so will increase operating and repair costs, decrease capacity and efficiency and shorten the service life of the equipment. A common symptom of a dirty filter in the cooling mode is a freeze-up of the indoor coil. The air filters used may be a disposable (throwaway) type or may be a cleanable type that can be thoroughly cleaned, rinsed and reused many times. It is important to make sure that the correct filter size and type for your system is always used. If there is any question as to acceptable filter size or type, review the installation instructions for the specific equipment involved, if available. Otherwise, consult with your installing dealer or service company. Most equipment can have the filters inspected and serviced by the user with no problems. In some instances, because of equipment design or specific installation conditions, it may be necessary to have this procedure done by a qualified service company. Have your installer or service company show you where the filter(s) are and demonstrate the service procedure or make arrangements for them to provide this service on an as-needed basis. Outdoor Unit Wall Mount Room Air Filters Wall mount filters are normally accessed from the outside of the building. Bard does offer a return air grille with a filter frame built-in for indoor filter access. The return air filter grille is not acceptable as the only source of filtration if vent options are installed in the wall mount unit.
Return Air Filter Grille: Bard offers the RFG return air filter grille, which may be used in applications where outdoor air is not brought into the structure through vent options. If vent options are used, the filter tray inside the Bard Wall Mount unit must be used.

The product installation instructions contain additional information regarding unit maintenance. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Manual 2100-034G Page 12 of 21

Unit Maintenance Filters

WALL MOUNT Products Filters and Filter Servicing
The built-in filter tray and room air filters in the wall mount are located in the middle of the cabinet below the indoor blowers. Units with vent options will have a washable screen behind the vent intake panel.

Filter Door: The unit room air filter is located behind this panel for units without a vent hood.
Vent Intake Panel
Vent Hood Door: The unit indoor filter is located behind
this panel for units with a vent hood. The hood contains a washable pre-filter
that needs to be cleaned regularly.

Vent Intake Panel

Filter Door:
The unit room air filter is located behind this panel.

Unit Maintenance Filters

Manual 2100-034G

Page

13 of 21

I-TEC Indoor Products Filters and Filter Servicing
The I-TEC indoor air conditioners and heat pumps have multiple filters that must be maintained and inspected when servicing the unit. Filters play an important part in proper unit operation and prevent dirt and dust buildup inside the I-TEC and the room the unit is installed in. To access the unit filters, open the front hinged doors by unlocking the door latches. The doors fold outward and are on hinges with lift-off pins. Use care when opening doors. If doors are lifted off of the hinge pins, use care as the dense insulation used for sound reduction causes the doors to be heavy.
The upper section of the unit contains two 2" x 24" x 30" throwaway filters as standard with every unit. MERV ratings of the filter are available up to MERV13. These filters filter the air used for cooling inside the classroom or structure and should be changed regularly.
If the unit has an air intake vent option installed, two 1" x 12" x 20" filters are located in the lower section of the front doors behind the louvers. These filters help keep the vent option clean and operating properly.
Two washable filters are also installed in the air intake vent option. These should be inspected during servicing and cleaned when necessary. The washable filters are used to remove dirt and dust from outdoor air that is entering the vent area. If at any time these filters are damaged, they must be replaced with Bard-approved filters.

I-TEC Filter Locations:
Servicing the filters in your unit will help keep the inside of the unit clean and also the area it is installed in.

The I-TEC product installation instructions contain additional information regarding unit maintenance. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Manual 2100-034G Page 14 of 21

Unit Maintenance Filters

Q-TEC Indoor Products Filters and Filter Servicing
The Q-TEC indoor air conditioners and heat pumps have two room air filters that must be replaced when servicing the unit. Filters play an important part in proper unit operation and prevent dirt and dust buildup inside the Q-TEC and the room the unit is installed in. To access the unit filters, open the front hinged door by unlocking the door latch. The door folds outward and is on hinges with lift-off pins. Use care when opening doors. If the door is lifted off of the hinge pins, use care as the insulation and louver grille cause the door to be heavy.
The upper section of the Q-TEC contains two 1" throwaway filters standard with every unit. These filters filter the air used for cooling inside the classroom or structure and should be changed regularly.

QWS Unit

QH/QA Unit

Q-TEC Filter Location: The Q-TEC room air filters are located behind this hinged door. Unlock door latch and remove screw to open door.
Screw location
Filter locations

Pre-filter location
The Q-TEC will have a permanent pre-filter installed inside the wall sleeve if air intake vent options are inside the unit. The pre-filter must be inspected and cleaned when necessary. The easiest way to remove the pre-filter is through the outdoor louver. Clean the pre-filter with soapy water.

The Q-TEC product installation instructions contain additional information regarding unit maintenance. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Unit Maintenance Filters

Manual 2100-034G

Page

15 of 21

All Products Coil Cleaning
The outdoor coil must be kept clean and free of any airborne debris, which can accumulate over time. Large volumes of air are circulated over the coil, and airborne debris such as lint, dust, materials shed from trees, paper or other types of airborne material that can become airborne can collect on the entering coil surface. The outdoor coil must dissipate heat during the cooling mode and for a heat pump, also absorb heat during the heating mode. If the coil is dirty and matted with debris, the airflow across the coil will be reduced causing poor performance, increased operating run time and associated utility bills and in extreme conditions can shorten the useful life of the equipment.
Depending on the specific equipment involved, the surface that can accumulate debris can be on the opposite side that is exposed to view when standing in front of the machine. Closely review the machine when operating to see which direction or path the airflow takes as it moves through the machine. If the air inlet side of the coil is hidden, try to observe the back (hidden) side by looking into the side grilles, using a flashlight if necessary. While the user of the equipment needs to be aware of the potential of clogging of the outdoor coil surface, actual cleaning of the outdoor coil should not be attempted under most circumstances. If the user should attempt this procedure on their own, never do so without first having the installing dealer or service company instruct you in the proper procedure and technique.
WARNING: Do not open or enter the equipment without first turning off the electrical service disconnect. Failure to do so can result in personal injury due to moving parts and/or electric shock hazard resulting in death.
Other conditions that can cause reduction of airflow across the outdoor coil are flowers, shrubbery or other growth too near the outdoor coil air inlet and outlet openings. These living things, especially as they mature and grow, will be just as effective in blocking the airflow and create the same problems as will stacking things against the equipment. These conditions can be easily managed and controlled by the user, as they do not require actually entering into the equipment enclosure, which should only be done by qualified service technicians.
Equipment Corrosion Protection
1. Avoid having any lawn sprinkler spray directly on the equipment, especially if from a brackish water source.
2. In coastal areas or corrosive environments, locate equipment as far away from the corrosion source as feasible. Units exposed directly to salt spray should be coated by a secondary protective coating operation to reduce corrosion on copper tubing, fasteners, motors and other metal parts. Coils should be ordered with a corrosion protective coating. Contact Bard for coating options.
3. Frequent cleaning and waxing of the cabinet using a good automobile polish will help extend its original appearance and protect painted surfaces.

The product installation instructions contain additional information regarding unit coil cleaning. This information may be accessed at www.bardhvac.com.

Manual 2100-034G Page 16 of 21

Condenser Coil Cleaning

All Products Condenser Airflow
W**A, W**H, T**H, T**S, W*RV Wall Mount Units: These units are called "blow through condenser airflow" units because they draw cool outdoor air from the sides and blow the warm condenser air exiting the coil through the front grille.

C**H Wall Mount Units: These units are called "draw through condenser airflow" units because they draw cool outdoor air in the front through the coil and blow the exiting warm condenser air through the unit sides.
I-TEC and Q-TEC Units: These units draw the cool outdoor air through the top section of the wall louver and exhaust the warmer condenser air out of the lower section of the louver. I-TEC units also draw a small amount of air through the outer right and left side of the louver.

Condenser Coil Cleaning

Manual 2100-034G

Page

17 of 21

Unit Operation

Air-to-Air Cooling Products (Air Conditioners)
The cooling mode operates similar to a refrigerator, removing heat from inside the conditioned space and rejecting it outside of the space being controlled. There are three main parts of the system:
1. The evaporator (indoor) coil where cold refrigerant absorbs heat from the air, which circulates from the conditioned space through the machine and is returned to the space at a lower temperature and with some of the humidity (moisture) removed. The moisture exits through a condensate drain system. A motor/blower assembly moves the indoor air through the system.
2. The compressor, which is a sealed pump that moves the refrigerant through the system.
3. The condenser (outdoor) coil where the heat that was absorbed from the indoor space is discharged to the outdoor environment. A motor/fan system moves the outdoor air across the condenser coil. A properly sized air conditioner cannot cool a structure off rapidly and instead will pull down the temperature slowly. It also will remove a certain amount of moisture (humidity) from the circulating airstream in the process. It may take several hours to pull down a hot, moist building or structure on initial startup or anytime the system has been turned off for a long period of time. It is generally best to set the thermostat at a comfortable temperature and let it control the system as needed, rather than turning it on and off.
Moisture (humidity) removal with a conventional air conditioner (cooling) unit, or heat pump when operating in the cooling mode, is not directly controlled and is a by-product of the unit operating to control temperature in response to the temperature (thermostat) control device. Oversized equipment can easily control temperature but will have short run-times, thus reducing its ability to remove moisture from the circulating air stream.
There are also many additional influences that can affect humidity levels within the conditioned space such as laundry appliances, cooking, showers, exhaust fans and any other items that can generate moisture or affect its removal from the space. Therefore, while operation of the air conditioning or heat pump system in the cooling mode will remove some amount of moisture as it reduces the air temperature, precise humidity regulation in the conditioned space cannot be assured and additional equipment such as a dedicated dehumidifier may be required.
Air-to-Air Cooling and Heating Products (Heat Pumps)
A heat pump is a refrigerant-based system that has additional components and controls that both heats and cools using a compressor for both modes of operation. Most heat pumps will also be equipped with some amount of electric heat to supplement the heating capacity of the compressor system on an as-needed basis. This operation is entirely automatic and is controlled by the indoor thermostat and possibly also an outdoor thermostat.
Cooling Mode
The cooling mode of a heat pump is exactly the same as that described for an air conditioner in the above section.
Heating Mode
The system operates in reverse cycle, meaning that it absorbs and moves heat from the outdoors and transfers it indoors to be rejected into the circulating air stream. Even though it seems cold to humans, there is usable heat that can be extracted efficiently from the outdoor air down to 0ºF, although the colder the air is there is less heat to extract and the operating efficiency is diminished.
Defrost Cycle
When operating in the heating mode, the outdoor coil will be colder than the outdoor air that is forced over it by the fan system. When the outdoor air temperature is above approximately 40°F, moisture can accumulate on the coil and it will drain down and out the base of the unit. As the air temperature gets below approximately 40°F, the coil temperature will start to drop below 32°F, and frost or ice will begin to form on the coil.
An automatic defrost system keeps track of system run time when the outdoor coil temperature is in the freezing zone and will initiate a defrost cycle at the appropriate time. The unit continues to operate during the defrost cycle, but the outdoor fan motor will stop and the reversing valve will shift positions to flow hot refrigerant gas through the outdoor coil to melt the accumulated frost. Water will start to drain freely from the unit, and steam may be emitted from the unit.
The length of the defrost cycle will vary depending upon actual outdoor temperature, humidity levels and amount of accumulated frost. It could range from 1-2 minutes up to but not exceeding 8 minutes. When the defrost cycle

Manual 2100-034G Page 18 of 21

Unit Modes of Operation

terminates, the reversing valve will shift back to heating mode and the outdoor fan will restart. There is typically a large puff of steam emitted as the fan restarts. When the heat pump shifts from cool to heating mode, from heating to cooling mode and especially during defrost cycles, there will be a pressure transfer sound heard as the reversing valve redirects the flow of refrigerant. This is commonly described as a hissing noise and is a normal sound for this type equipment.
For air source heat pumps, it is important to keep heavy snow from accumulating around the machine to the point of blocking the inlet and outlet openings to the outdoor coil section. For wall mounted or other equipment that is elevated, this should not be a factor; but for equipment installed on or near the ground, this can be an issue in areas prone to heavy and/or blowing snow. The air source heat pump cannot operate effectively and efficiently when snowbound just as a car cannot function well in heavy snow conditions.
Water-to-Air Cooling and Heating Products (Geothermal Heat Pumps)
These types of heat pumps are also commonly referred to as water source or geothermal systems. Just like the air source heat pump, they are refrigerant-based systems that both heat and cool using a compressor for both modes of operation. The primary difference is that the system uses water or antifreeze-protected water solution instead of an air-cooled outdoor heat transfer coil, and there is no outdoor motor/fan system but instead a water pump to provide adequate water flow to the system.
Cooling Mode
The cooling mode of a water-to-air heat pump is exactly the same as that described for an air conditioner in the previous Air Conditioner section, except that the outdoor coil uses water instead of air for the heat transfer medium.
Heat Mode
The system operates in reverse cycle, meaning that it acquires and moves heat from the water supply flowing through the water to refrigerant coil and transfers it indoors to be rejected into the circulating air stream.
Most water-to-air heat pumps (but not all) will also be equipped with some amount of electric heat to supplement the heating capacity of the compressor system on an as-needed basis. This operation is entirely automatic and is controlled by the indoor thermostat.
Because of the design of water-to-air heat pumps and the water temperatures involved, no defrost system is required as in air-to-air heat pumps.
Water Supply Systems
Depending upon the type and application of the water-to-air heat pump, the water side of the system could be one of the following:
1. Individual closed loop buried in a trench or vertical bore hole(s).
2. Individual loop submerged in a pond.
3. Water supplied from a well and discharged into pond, stream, ditch or another well.
4. Water supplied from a boiler/tower system, typically only in larger multi-unit installations.

Unit Modes of Operation

Manual 2100-034G

Page

19 of 21

Dehumidification and Ventilation Operation
Dehumidification (Air-to-Air or Water-to-Air Systems)
Many Bard systems, typically those used in schools or other commercial applications, have a dedicated dehumidification capability by having a special additional refrigeration circuit (factory-installed option only) in addition to the basic system. These special systems, sometimes also referred to as hot gas reheat, are designed to control humidity on demand from a humidity controller much the same as the basic cooling and/or heating system is controlled by a wall thermostat. Consult your installer and/or service company to determine if your installation has any of these devices and for any instructions or maintenance requirements you should be aware of as the user.
Ventilation Options (Air-to-Air or Water-to-Air Systems)
All Bard systems are available with factory-installed vent options. Most units can have ventilation field installed after unit installation.
Ventilation has multiple purposes:
· Outside air intake for occupied structures · Positive pressurization · Energy savings when outdoor air can be used for cooling · Agricultural use of bringing in outdoor air and exhausting room air · Equipment and electronics ventilation
Review product specifications and manuals for more details regarding available ventilation options and features. Product documentation is shipped with the product and also available at www.bardhvac.com.

Manual 2100-034G Page 20 of 21

Dehumidification and Ventilation Operation

Troubleshooting
All Units Troubleshooting
Your Bard product is made to operate for many trouble-free years if installed properly and maintenance practices are followed. Be sure to verify that all filters are clean, and condenser coils are free of dirt and debris. Often these items may look clean at first, but upon closer inspection, show signs of dirt and debris build-up. New units on new structures may have dirt and dust in filters from the building construction process.
Thermostats and unit controllers often contain vent holes for proper sensor measurement inside the device. Make sure the thermostat or controller are not full of dirt and dust from building construction or years of use.
Verify all requirements in the installation instructions and specification sheets are met. Unit voltages, airflow clearance requirements and clean unit power without brownouts or spikes play a critical role in unit performance. If 208 VAC power is supplied to the unit, the 208V tap must be used on the 24 VAC transformer located inside the control panel. Common sense must also be used when installing the unit in an environment that may put the unit at risk of improper operation.
Helpful Hints and Good Operating Practices
The following information will help you enjoy the full comfort and benefits of your Bard cooling and heating system, maximize the performance and efficiency and help extend the life of your system.
1. Always keep the equipment in peak operating condition with routine scheduled maintenance, especially for the air filters, and to assure a clean outdoor coil.
2. For most efficient operation, set the thermostat at the temperature you prefer and then let it take control. If any changes to the settings are required, they should be made in small adjustments and the system be allowed time to respond. Rapid changes either up or down should not be done.
3. Setting the thermostat very high does not make the system heat faster and setting it very low does not make it cool faster.
4. It is not recommended to turn the system "Off" then back "On" when you need it. This can allow temperature and humidity to build up in warm weather conditions and force the system to run continuously to try and catch up. If the building is to be unoccupied for a lengthy period, it is best to adjust the thermostat to a reasonable higher (or lower--depending on the season) setting rather than turning it completely off. Upon return, the inside conditions will not be totally out of control and recovery time to desired conditions would be much shorter.
5. Airflow inside the room or building is very important. Keep all supply registers open and all returns free and unrestricted. Avoid placing objects in areas that will hinder unit airflow. The heating and cooling system is designed to have a certain amount of airflow for proper operation. Therefore, closing off registers, in unused rooms as an example, could reduce airflow below acceptable levels and should not be done without review by your service company who can assess the overall situation and advise you accordingly.
6. Heat pumps, especially air-to-air heat pumps, may have the system (compressor) run continuously at lower outdoor temperatures, and this is normal. The heat pump (compressor) mode is controlled by the beginning stages of the thermostat and delivers the most efficient heat. As the outdoor temperature drops off, the heat pump mode heat will also diminish (because there is less heat in the outdoor air to absorb) and must be supplemented by additional electric heat stages, which are not as efficient as the heat pump. The thermostat automatically controls everything and the backup heat will only operate on demand as needed to maintain the desired temperature.
7. The thermostat or controller is the user's primary connection to the system so it is very important to have a thorough understanding of how it works and how to use it properly. Have your installer or service company explain and demonstrate proper operation of the controls.
8. Make sure you thoroughly understand how the heating and cooling system itself is intended to operate and what to expect from it. Have your installer or service company explain and demonstrate proper operation of the heating and cooling system.

Troubleshooting

Manual 2100-034G

Page

21 of 21

REPLACEMENT PARTS MANUAL

MEGA-TEC® Wall Mount Air Conditioner
Models:
W180BPS W180BES W180BPT W180BET W180BPN W180BEN W180BPQ W180BEQ

Contents

Description

Page

External Parts Exploded View.............................................. 2 Usage List.................................................... 3 Usage List.................................................... 4
Internal Parts Exploded View.............................................. 6 Usage List.................................................... 7 Usage List.................................................... 8
Economizer Intake Hoods Exploded View............................................ 10 Usage List.................................................. 11
System Components Layout View................................................ 12 Usage List.................................................. 13
Fan System Components Exploded View............................................ 14 Usage List.................................................. 15
Sensors and Peripheral Devices Layout View................................................ 16 Usage List.................................................. 17
Control Panel S Voltage Layout View................................................ 18 Usage List.................................................. 19 Usage List.................................................. 20
Control Panel T, Q & N Voltage Layout View................................................ 22 Usage List.................................................. 23 Usage List.................................................. 24

Description

Page

Electric Heat Components Exploded View............................................. 26 Usage List................................................... 27
Right and Left Intake Damper Assemblies Exploded View............................................. 28 Usage List................................................... 29
Right and Left Exhaust Damper Assembly Exploded View............................................. 30 Usage List................................................... 31
Exhaust Damper Actuator Assemblies Exploded View............................................. 32 Usage List................................................... 32
575V Transformer Assembly Exploded View............................................. 33 Usage List................................................... 33

General Notes
Revised and/or additional pages may be issued from time to time.
A complete and current manual consists of pages shown in the following contents section.
Important
Contact the installing and/or local Bard distributor for all parts requirements. Make sure to have the complete model and serial number available from the unit rating plates.

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506
www.bardhvac.com

Manual: 2110-1466G

Supersedes: 2110-1466F

Date:

12-11-23

Page

1 of 33

EXTERNAL PARTS

27 26 25
24 20

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SEXP-1043

This drawing to be used for reference for pages 3 and 4
Manual 2110-1466G Page 2 of 33

EXTERNAL PARTS

W180B****E W180B****B

Dwg No.

Part Number

Description

S553-743-*

S553-761

S501-1097-*

S501-1124

S501-1109-*

S501-1126

145-208-*

145-209

507-398-*

507-406

113-872-*

113-917

111-331

509-439

509-466

S501-1096-*

S501-1123

S501-1108-*

S501-1125

111-330

509-440

509-468

509-458

509-469

109-441

109-467

118-150-*

118-154

135-404-*

135-414

135-407-*

135-416

527-597

527-606

135-406-*

135-415

S553-749-*

S553-759

533-326-*

533-353

S553-744-*

S553-757

157-031-*

157-033

167-030-*

167-033

S553-746-*

S553-758

Evaporator Door Assembly RH (with Hinges) Evaporator Door Assembly RH (with Hinges)
Left Side Assembly (Economizer) Left Side Assembly (Economizer) Left Side Assembly (Non-Economizer) Left Side Assembly (Non-Economizer)
Rain Channel Evap Rain Channel Evap
Top Assembly Top Assembly
Rain Flashing Rain Flashing
Supply Air Frame
Upper Back Assembly Upper Back Assembly
Right Side Assembly (Economizer) Right Side Assembly (Economizer) Right Side Assembly (Non-Economizer) Right Side Assembly (Non-Economizer)
Return Air Frame
Middle Back Assembly (Economizer) Middle Back Assembly (Economizer) Middle Back Assembly (Non-Economizer) Middle Back Assembly (Non-Economizer)
Lower Back Lower Back
Condenser Grille Condenser Grille
Rain Channel Horizontal Rain Channel Horizontal
Rain Channel Blower Rain Channel Blower
Base Assembly Base Assembly
Rain Channel CP Rain Channel CP
Blower Door Assembly RH Blower Door Assembly RH
Control Panel Door Assembly RH Control Panel Door Assembly RH
Condenser Door Assembly RH (includes Venturi Ring and Service Port Cover) Condenser Door Assembly RH (includes Venturi Ring and Service Port Cover)
Service Port Cover Service Port Cover
Right Venturi Ring Right Venturi Ring
Condenser Door Assembly LH (includes Venturi Ring and Service Port Cover) Condenser Door Assembly LH (includes Venturi Ring and Service Port Cover)
Continued on page 4

XX XX
X X
X X
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
22
XX XX
X X
X X
22
X X
X X
XX XX
22 22
33 33
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
22 22
XX XX
XX XX

Exterior cabinet parts are manufactured with various paint color options. To ensure the proper paint color is received, include the complete model and serial number of the unit for which cabinet parts are being ordered.
k Cabinet components are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

3 of 33

EXTERNAL PARTS

W180B****E W180B****B

Dwg No.
23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 NS NS

Part Number
167-032-* 167-034 S153-745-* S153-763 S533-325-* S533-354 S553-748-* S553-760 S553-747-* S553-762 S400-0465 5252-033

Description
Continued from page 3
Left Venturi Ring Left Venturi Ring
Control Panel Access Door Control Panel Access Door
Control Panel Door Assembly LH (includes Control Panel Access Door) Control Panel Door Assembly LH (includes Control Panel Access Door)
Blower Door Assembly LH Blower Door Assembly LH
Evaporator Door Assembly LH (with Hinges) Evaporator Door Assembly LH (with Hinges)
Handle Kit
Bard Nameplate

XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX XX
XX
XX

Manual 2110-1466G Page 4 of 33

Refer to drawing on page 2

This page intentionally left blank

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

5 of 33

INTERNAL PARTS

45 8
46

12 47
42

40 10
39

33 14
32

31
48 29

23 21
28

22 22
27 26 16 25 19 20 23 24 20 19

This drawing to be used for reference for pages 7 and 8

SEXP-1053

Manual 2110-1466G Page 6 of 33

INTERNAL PARTS

W180B****E W180B****B

Dwg No. Part Number

Description

137Y997

113-897

521Y620

541-535

135-405

121Y619

521X620

105-1512

137X997

541-534

131X177

103-548

521X631

523-168

S521-612

S521-628

S133-335

113X878

113X921

113-889

113-735

113-840

113-738

113-841

143-231

143-249

113-874

113-928

113-869

113-915

113-875

113-918

113X865

113X920

121X615

121X637

121Y615

121Y637

113Y865

113Y920

113Y878

113Y921

121X617

S133-327

S133-328

Filter Retainer LH
Electric Heat Frame Support
Evaporator Cap Assembly LH (includes Electric Heat Frame Support)
Evaporator Support Bracket Assembly Rear LH
Insulation Shield
Center Partition Evaporator Assembly LH
Evaporator Cap Assembly RH (includes Electric Heat Frame Support)
Filter Angle
Filter Retainer RH
Evaporator Support Bracket Assembly Rear LH
Filter Removal Tray RH
Filter Offset
Evaporator Partition Assembly RH
Drain Pan Assembly RH
Blower Partition Assembly RH (Economizer) Blower Partition Assembly RH (Non-Economizer)
Control Panel Cover (Inner) RH
Fan Mount - Upper RH Fan Mount - Upper RH
Control Panel Cover Support
Wheel Slide Wheel Slide Track Guide Track Guide Back Access Cover Back Access Cover Filter Drier Bracket Filter Drier Bracket Service Port Bracket Service Port Bracket Fan Mount - Lower Fan Mount - Lower Fan Mounting Bracket RH Fan Mounting Bracket RH Center Partition - Condenser RH Center Partition - Condenser RH Center Partition - Condenser LH Center Partition - Condenser LH Fan Mounting Bracket LH Fan Mounting Bracket LH Fan Mount - Upper LH Fan Mount - Upper LH
Center Partition - Blower RH Control Panel Cover (Inner) LH (2) CB or (2) Disconnects Control Panel Cover (Inner) LH 230V (3) CB Control Panel Cover (Inner) LH 460V (1) Disconnect
Continued on page 8

Internal parts are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"

XX
22
XX
XX
22
XX
XX
22
XX
XX
XX
22
XX
XX
X X
XX
XX XX
22
44 44 44 44 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX
XX XX XX XX

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

7 of 33

INTERNAL PARTS

Dwg No. Part Number

113X876

517-431

517-442

517-438

517-443

S521-632

S521-633

521X619

121Y617

523-167

521Y631

141-528

113Y876

113-733

113-732

141X530

141-533

141Y530

131Y177

113-870

113-916

521X622

521X638

521X629

521X639

521Y622

521Y638

521Y629

521Y639

113X879

113Y879

113-867

113-914

8550-011

8550-014

Description
Continued from page 7
Evaporator Door Support Guide RH Control Panel Assembly (Economizer) Control Panel Assembly (Economizer) Control Panel Assembly (Non- Economizer) Control Panel Assembly (Non- Economizer) Blower Partition Assembly LH (Economizer) Blower Partition Assembly LH (Non-Economizer)
Center Partition Evaporator Assembly RH
Center Partition - Blower LH
Drain Pan Assembly LH
Evaporator Partition Assembly LH
Evaporator Horizontal Support
Evaporator Door Support Guide LH
Evaporator Door Hinge Arm
Evaporator Door Arm Bracket
Evaporator Coil Front Support RH
Electric Heat Bracket
Evaporator Coil Front Support LH
Filter Removal Tray LH
Lifting Bracket Lifting Bracket Condenser Partition Assembly RH (Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly RH (Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly RH (Non-Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly RH (Non-Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly LH (Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly LH (Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly LH (Non-Economizer) Condenser Partition Assembly LH (Non-Economizer) Air Deflector RH (Non-Economizer) Air Deflector LH (Non-Economizer)
Door Switch Bracket Door Switch Bracket
Filter Drier Strap Filter Drier Strap

Internal parts are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S" NS Not Shown

Manual 2110-1466G Page 8 of 33

Refer to drawing on page 6

W180B****E W180B****B

XX X X
X X X X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
22
22
XX
XX
XX
XX
22 22 X X
X X X X X X X X
22 22
22 22

This page intentionally left blank

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

9 of 33

ECONOMIZER INTAKE HOODS 1
6 5

2 3
4
SEXP-899 A

Manual 2110-1466G Page 10 of 33

ECONOMIZER INTAKE HOODS

W180B****E

Dwg No. Part Number

Description

501-1039-*BX

Economizer Hood Left Side Assembly (includes Side Filter Angle)

501-1120BX k

Economizer Hood Left Side Assembly (includes Side Filter Angle)

507-397-*BX

Economizer Top Assembly

507-405BX k

Economizer Top Assembly

7003-086

Mist Eliminator

501-1040-*BX

Economizer Hood Right Side Assembly (includes Side Filter Angle)

501-1121BX k

Economizer Hood Right Side Assembly (includes Side Filter Angle)

527-596-*BX

Economizer Hood Base Assembly (includes Mist Eliminator Support) X

527-608BX k

Economizer Hood Base Assembly (includes Mist Eliminator Support) X

119-151-*BX

Economizer Grille

119-155BX k

Economizer Grille

Exterior cabinet parts are manufactured with various paint color options. To ensure the proper paint color is received, include the complete model and serial number of the unit for which cabinet parts are being ordered.
k Economizer intake hood components are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

11 of 33

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
16 17

16 17

15 CIRCUIT 1
2 3 14 13
CIRCUIT 1

1 CIRCUIT 2
2 3 4 5
CIRCUIT 2

8 12 11 10 9

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 2

SEXP-1044 A

Manual 2110-1466G Page 12 of 33

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

W180B*S W180B*T W180B*N W180B*Q

Dwg.

No. Circuit Part Number

2 917-0441BX

2 917-0452BX

Description
Evaporator Coil Assembly RH (Green Hydrophillic Coated) Evaporator Coil Assembly RH (Phenolic Coated)

-- 5651-246

EEV Cable and Stator

-- 5651-251

Electronic Expansive Valve

2 S900-390-001 Indoor Programmed Blower Assembly RH

2 S900-392-001 Indoor Programmed Blower Assembly RH

2 5051-239BX Right Condenser Coil

2 5054-239BX Right Condenser Coil (Phenolic Coated)

-- 5201-026

Refrigerant Filter Drier

2 8000-476

1-Stage Compressor (ZP83KCE-TF5-130)

2 8000-474

1-Stage Compressor (ZP83KCE-TFD-130)

2 8000-471

1-Stage Compressor (ZP83KCE-TF7-130)

2 8000-472

1-Stage Compressor (ZP83KCE-TFE-130)

XXXX OOOO
2222
2222
X XXX
XXXX OOOO
2222
X X X X

-- 8605-017

Compressor Crankcase Heater

-- 8605-018

Compressor Crankcase Heater

-- 8605-021

Compressor Crankcase Heater

2 22 2

3000-1606

Compressor Power Plug

2222

-- 910-2186

575V Transformer/Junction Box Assembly (see page 33)

3000-1604

LH Compressor Staging Solenoid Plug

XXXX

1 8000-477

2-Stage Compressor (ZPS83KCE-TF5-130)

1 8000-475

2-Stage Compressor (ZPS83KCE-TFD-130)

1 8000-484

2-Stage Compressor(ZPSS83KCE-TF7-130)

1 8000-473

2-Stage Compressor (ZPS83KCE-TFE-130)

X X X X

1 5051-238BX Left Condenser Coil

1 5054-238BX Left Condenser Coil (Phenolic Coated)

XXXX OOOO

1 S900-389-001 Indoor Programmed Blower Assembly LH

1 S900-391-001 Indoor Programmed Blower Assembly LH

X XXX

1 917-0442BX Evaporator Coil Assembly LH (Green Hydrophillic Coated)

XXXX

1 917-0453BX Evaporator Coil Assembly LH (Phenolic Coated)

OOOO

-- 5400-010

Metal Leaf Hinge

4444

-- 1012-130

Torx Screws (for hinges, 2-per)

8888

-- 7004-025

Air Filter 2" MERV 8 (16 x 25 x 2)

-- 7004-059

Air Filter 2" MERV 11 (16 x 25 x 2)

-- 7004-061

Air Filter 2" MERV 13 (16 x 25 x 2)

6666 6666 6666

NS Not Shown
MEGA-TEC Series wall-mounted air conditioners have two separate refrigeration circuits: Circuit 1 is the two stage system located on the left side of the unit and circuit 2 is the single stage system on the right side.
Optional on these models

X Standard Components O Optional Components

NOTE: Refrigerant pressure switches, transducers and system temperature sensors can be found on pages 16 and 17.

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

13 of 33

FAN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2

RIGHT FAN

LEFT FAN RIGHT FAN

1
LEFT FAN 14

2 4

1 LEFT FAN

T FAN

RIGHT FAN

8 9

2 13 12 11 4 10
Manual 2110-1466G Page 14 of 33

7 8 9

6 SEXP-1052

FAN SYSTEM COMPONENTS

W180B*S W180B*T W180B*N W180B*Q

Dwg

No. Circuit Part Number

Description

S922-0004-001 Left Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3) X

922-0008-001 Left Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3) X

S922-0006-001 Left Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3)

XXX

922-0010-001 Left Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3)

XXX

113-737

113-898

Fan Hinge Fan Hinge

8888 8888

5401-008

Anti-Pivot Rod

2222

5451-029

Nylon Sleeve

4444

113-735

113-840

Wheel Slide Wheel Slide

4444 4444

8200-057

Left Fan Slide Welded Frame

8200-059

Left Fan Slide Welded Frame

XXXX XXXX

113-738

113-841

Track Guide Track Guide

4444 4444

8200-056

Right Fan Slide Welded Frame

8200-058

Right Fan Slide Welded Frame

XXXX XXXX

1171-035

Plastic Wheel, 3" Diameter

8888

113-752

113-839

Fan Safety Lock Bracket Fan Safety Lock Bracket

2222 2222

113-875

113-918

Fan Mount - Lower Fan Mount - Lower

2222 2222

5401-007

Fan Stop Rod

2222

141-541

141-550

Fan Wedge Bracket Fan Wedge Bracket

4444 4444

S922-0005-001 Right Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3)

922-0009-001 Right Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3) X

S922-0007-001 Right Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3)

XXX

922-0011-001 Right Fan & Motor Bracket Assembly (includes Dwg. No. 2 & 3)

MEGA-TEC Series wall-mounted air conditioners have two separate refrigeration circuits: Circuit 1 is the two stage system located on the left side of the unit and circuit 2 is the single stage system on the right side.
Fan system components are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

15 of 33

SENSORS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES

19
16 7 18 9 17 15 12 14 12 13

Manual 2110-1466G Page 16 of 33

3 4 5 11 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 12 SEXP-1045

SENSORS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES

W180B****E W180B****B

Dwg No.
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19

Part Number
8301-104 8301-104 8620-296 8620-296 8301-089 8620-296 8620-224 8406-158 8620-296 8406-157 8611-199 8620-296 8406-156 8406-142 8301-091 8620-296 8620-296 8612-064 8620-224 8301-104 8301-104

Description
Filter Switch w/Adjustment (910-2154 RH) Blower Fail Switch w/Adjustment (910-2154 RH) Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2143 LH SAT) Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2144 RH SAT) Outdoor Temp and Humidity Sensor (910-2056) Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2054 RAT) 3/8" Defrost Sensor Kit (910-2077 LLT2 Liquid Line Temp Sensor) Low Pressure Transducer - Blue Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2157 MAT2 Mixed Air Sensor) High Pressure Transducer - Red Dirty Filter Light Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2076 ST2 Suction Temp Sensor) Door Switch High Pressure Switch Particulate Dust Sensor (910-2088) Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2156 MAT1 Mixed Air Sensor) Sensor Replacement Kit (910-2084 ST1 Suction Temp Sensor) Dust Sensor Control Board (910-2142) 3/8" Defrost Sensor Kit (910-2148 LLT1 Liquid Line Temp Sensor) Filter Switch w/Adjustment (910-2141 LH) Blower Fail Switch w/Adjustment (910-2141 LH)

XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 22 X 22 XX XX 44 22 X X XX X XX XX XX

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

17 of 33

CONTROL PANEL S (230/208-60-3 & 220/200-50-3)

Manual 2110-1466G Page 18 of 33

22 9

This drawing to be used for reference for pages 19 and 20

24 266
23
44

265 2
266

4
23 OR 24 23

43 44

55 265 2

44 4

18 57

19 3

44 235
11

16 47 49 40 50 38 39 247 48 49

PLC

15 13

45
40 38 40 42 41 42
46

10 21
20 44 6
21 36
44

37
8 SEXP-1046

CONTROL PANEL S (230/208-60-3 & 220/200-50-3)

W180BPS0Z W180BPS09 W180BPS18 W180BPS36 W180BES18

Dwg No.

Part Number

Description

117-430

Control Sub Panel

113-933

Riser

8301-099-002*

UPC3-C2 MEGA-TEC

113-858

7-1/4" DIN Rail

113-860

Rain Channel Control Support

113-854

13" DIN Rail

113-857

6-7/16" DIN Rail

113-853

5" DIN Rail

8611-258-5700

57" 3-1/4 X 1-1/2 Cable Duct

8611-229-0712

3-1/4" X 1" Cable Duct X 7-3/4"

8611-183

2-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-147

3-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-148

4-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-217

5-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-218

6-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-185

8-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-149

9-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8611-192

3-Pin Circuit Board Connector

8301-075

USB Micro Cable Female to Male

8301-081

C.PCOE Expansion PLC Board

8611-226

Terminal Block Kit for C.PCOE

8607-070

Power Terminal Block 3-Pole

8615-110

Circuit Breaker 60A 3-Pole

8615-109

8615-107

Circuit Breaker 50A 3-Pole Circuit Breaker 30A 3-Pole

8401-037

Contactor 3-Pole 30 Amp

8401-041

Contactor 3-Pole 40 Amp

8201-174BX

3 Phase Line Monitor 50/60 HZ

8407-065

Transformer 208/240-24 75VA

8201-171BX

Compressor Control Module

8201-130

Relay, SPDT, Pilot Duty

8607-058

Double Level Terminal Block

8607-060

Terminal Block Insul. 12-Position

8607-061

Terminal Block 16-Position

8607-072

Terminal Block 8-Position

8611-006

Terminal

8611-150

Terminal Block for DIN Rail RS485

8611-151

Terminal Block End Cap for DIN Rail

8611-208

Jumper 3-Position

Continued on page 20

XXX

222

555

XXX

333

XXX

222

XXX

222

XXX

X32

222

XXX

222

25 25 25 25

XXX

222

11 11 11 11

555

333

* Replacement part will have a letter attached to the end of the part number to designate software version (Example: 8301-099-002A). A software upgrade of all PLCs onsite (units and controllers) should accompany any PLC replacement. Latest revisions of software and instructions are available on the Bard website at http:// www.bardhvac.com/software-download/

Wiring diagram reference listed under ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS on page 27.

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

19 of 33

W180BPS0Z W180BPS09 W180BPS18 W180BPS36 W180BES18

CONTROL PANEL S (230/208-60-3 & 220/200-50-3)

Dwg No.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 57 235 247 265 265 266 266

Part Number
8611-224 8611-195 8611-203 8611-194 8611-221 8611-144 8607-056 8607-055 8607-054 8607-053 8607-059 8607-064 8611-255 8611-237 8607-065 8615-088 8615-105 8615-090 8615-104

Description Continued from page 19
Jumper 20-Position Jumper 4-Position Jumper 10-Position Jumper 2-Position End Cover End Clamp for DIN Rail Terminal Designation (1-10) Terminal Designation (11-20) Terminal Designation (21-30) Terminal Designation (31-40) Terminal Designation (41-50) Terminal Designation (51-60) 4-Pin Circuit Board Connector Plug 3-Pin Circuit Board Connector Terminal Designation (61-70) Jumper Bar Main Lugs Jumper Bar Main Lugs Two Circuit Bus Bar 3-Pole Three Circuit Bus Bar 9-Pole

Wiring diagram reference listed under ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS on page 27.

XXX

333

XXX

222

XXX

10 10 10 10

222

XXX

Manual 2110-1466G Page 20 of 33

Refer to drawing on page 18

This page intentionally left blank

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

21 of 33

CONTROL PANEL T (460-60-3 & 400-50-3), Q (575-60-3) & N (400-60-3)

Manual 2110-1466G Page 22 of 33

22 9

This drawing to be used for reference for pages 23 and 24

35 23 24
2 4
43 44

29 30

19 3

6 44

235

15 13

39 41

247 42

36 44

37
8 SEXP-1047

CONTROL PANEL T (460-60-3 & 400-50-3), Q (575-60-3) & N (400-60-3)

W180BPT0Z W180BPT09 W180BPT18 W180BPT36 W180BET18 W180BPQ0Z W180BPQ09 W180BPQ18 W180BPQ36 W180BEQ18 W180BPN0Z W180BPN09 W180BPN18 W180BPN36 W180BEN18

Dwg No. Part Number

Description

117-430

Control Sub Panel

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-859

Riser

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

8301-099-002* UPC3-C2 MEGA-TEC

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-858

7-1/4" DIN Rail

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-860

Rain Channel Control Support

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-854

13" DIN Rail

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-857

6-7/16" DIN Rail

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

113-853

5" DIN Rail

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

8611-258-5700 57" 3-1/4 X 1-1/2 Cable Duct

222222222222222

10 8611-229-0712 3-1/4" X 1" Cable Duct X 7-3/4"

555555555555555

11 8611-183

2-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

12 8611-147

3-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

13 8611-148

4-Pin Circuit Board Connector

333333333333333

14 8611-217

5-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

15 8611-218

6-Pin Circuit Board Connector

222222222222222

16 8611-185

8-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

17 8611-149

9-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

18 8611-192

3-Pin Circuit Board Connector

222222222222222

19 8301-075

USB Micro Cable Female to Male

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

20 8301-081

C.PCOE Expansion PLC Board

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

21 8611-226

Terminal Block Kit for C.PCOE

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

22 8607-070

Power Terminal Block 3-Pole

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

23 S8615-095

Toggle Disconnect

XXXX2XXXXXXXXX2

24 8615-096

Disconnect Cover

XXXX2XXXXXXXXX2

25 8401-037

Contactor 3-Pole 30 Amp

222222222222222

26 8401-035

Contactor 3-Pole 25 Amp

X222

27 8201-174BX

3 Phase Line Monitor 50/60 HZ

222222222222222

28 8407-072

Transformer 460-24 75VA

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

29 8201-171BX

Compressor Control Module

222222222222222

30 8201-130

Relay, SPDT, Pilot Duty

222222222222222

31 8607-058

Double Level Terminal Block

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

32 8607-060

Terminal Block Insul. 12-Position

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

33 8607-061

Terminal Block 16-Position

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

34 8607-072

Terminal Block 8-Position

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

35 8611-006

Terminal

222222222222222

36 8611-150

Terminal Block for DIN Rail RS485 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

37 8611-151

Terminal Block End Cap for DIN Rail 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

38 8611-208

Jumper 3-Position

333333333333333

Continued on page 24

Wiring diagram reference listed under ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS on page 27.

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

23 of 33

W180BPT0Z W180BPT09 W180BPT18 W180BPT36 W180BET18 W180BPQ0Z W180BPQ09 W180BPQ18 W180BPQ36 W180BEQ18 W180BPN0Z W180BPN09 W180BPN18 W180BPN36 W180BEN18

CONTROL PANEL T (460-60-3 & 400-50-3), Q (575-60-3) & N (400-60-3)

Dwg No. Part Number
39 8611-224 40 8611-195 41 8611-203 42 8611-194 43 8611-221 44 8611-144 45 8607-056 46 8607-055 47 8607-054 48 8607-053 49 8607-059 50 8607-064 57 8611-255 235 8611-237 247 8607-065

Description

Continued from page 23

Jumper 20-Position

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Jumper 4-Position

333333333333333

Jumper 10-Position

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Jumper 2-Position

222222222222222

End Cover

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

End Clamp for DIN Rail

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Terminal Designation (1-10)

222222222222222

Terminal Designation (11-20)

222222222222222

Terminal Designation (21-30)

222222222222222

Terminal Designation (31-40)

222222222222222

Terminal Designation (41-50)

222222222222222

Terminal Designation (51-60)

222222222222222

4-Pin Circuit Board Connector Plug X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

3-Pin Circuit Board Connector

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Terminal Designation (61-70)

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Wiring diagram reference listed under ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS on page 27.

Manual 2110-1466G Page 24 of 33

Refer to drawing on page 22

This page intentionally left blank

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

25 of 33

ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS

2 4 5 6 8 7 2

6
Manual 2110-1466G Page 26 of 33

6 SEXP-1048

ELECTRIC HEAT COMPONENTS

W180BPS0Z W180BPS09 W180BPS18 W180BPS36 W180BES18 W180BPT0Z W180BPT09 W180BPT18 W180BPT36 W180BET18 W180BPQ0Z W180BPQ09 W180BPQ18 W180BPQ36 W180BEQ18 W180BPN0Z W180BPN09 W180BPN18 W180BPN36 W180BEN18

Dwg Part No. Number
1 112-886 2 113-887 3 113Y888 4 113X888 5 8402-215 5 8402-216 5 8402-217 6 113-884
7 8604-151 7 8604-152 7 8604-153 7 8604-161 7 8604-162 7 8604-163
8 113-897
NS 136-1002
NS 4212-211 NS 4212-212 NS 4212-213 NS 4212-214 NS 4212-307 NS 4212-308 NS 4212-309 NS 4212-310 NS 4212-704 NS 4212-706 NS 4212-707
NS Not Shown

Description Electric Heat Cover Plate

X222

Electric Heat Front/Back

2444 2444 2444 2444

LH Limit Mount

XXXX

RH Limit Mount

XXX

Limit Control Limit Control Limit Control

36 6 6

Electric Heat Top/Bottom

2444 2444 2444 2444

Heater Element, 3KW, 240/208V, 2-Term Heater Element, 3KW, 460V, 2-Term Heater Element, 3KW, 575V, 2-Term Heater Element, 6KW, 575V, 2-Term Heater Element, 6KW, 460V, 2-Term Heater Element, 6KW, 240/208V, 2-Term

36 6 6

Electric Heat Frame Support

X222

Electric Fill Plate (for use when no heater installed)

Wiring Diagram

XXX

Wiring Diagram

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

27 of 33

RIGHT AND LEFT INTAKE DAMPER ASSEMBLIES

12 11 3 17 16 10

13 14

9 18 3

8 7

2 3 17 4 5
6 SEXP-900

Manual 2110-1466G Page 28 of 33

RIGHT AND LEFT INTAKE DAMPER ASSEMBLIES

W180B****E

Dwg. No. Part Number

Description

135-388

Recessed Actuator Box

1012-201

1/4"-20 Steel Keps Hex Nut

8602-040

BKP-24 Butterfly Pivot

539X447

539Y447

RH Intake Partition Assembly (includes Blade Seals)

LH Intake Partition Assembly (includes Blade Seals)

S1921-067-0900

9" Damper Blade Seal

8406-150

Blade Switch

NS 113-743

Blade Switch Bracket

S1921-067-3707

37-7/16" Damper Blade Seal

141-529

Intake Blade Support

8602-042

1/4" X 6" Rod

10 539-448

Intake Blade Assembly

11 8602-008

Ball Joint

12 1012-174
13 8602-078
14 910-2082 14 910-2155 14 8602-098
15 113-727

1/4"-20 x 3-1/4" Bolt

Crank Arm

RH Actuator Assembly (includes Crank Arm and wires)

LH Actuator Assembly (includes Crank Arm and wires)

Actuator Only

Actuator Mounting Bracket

16 113-862

Intake Damper Hinge

17 1012-343

1/4'-28 x 1/2" Bolt

18 1012-348

1/2" x 3/4" Nylon Flat Washer

NS Not Shown

NOTE: Quantities listed above are totals for both right and left intake damper assemblies.

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

29 of 33

9 SEXP-1049

12 12

8 7

RIGHT AND LEFT EXHAUST DAMPER ASSEMBLY
Manual 2110-1466G Page 30 of 33

6 3 7

RIGHT AND LEFT EXHAUST DAMPER ASSEMBLY

W180B****E

Dwg. No. Part Number

Description

8602-040

BKP-24 Butterfly Pivot

113-873

Exhaust Damper Hinge

113-925

Exhaust Damper Hinge

539-449

Exhaust Blade Assembly

539-453

Exhaust Blade Assembly

141-532

Exhaust Actuator Support

141-548

Exhaust Actuator Support

537X998

RH Economizer Deflector

537X1007

RH Economizer Deflector

537Y998

LH Economizer Deflector

537Y1007

LH Economizer Deflector

113-866

Damper Blade Bracket

113-923

Damper Blade Bracket

S1921-067-2403

24-3/16" Damper Blade Seal

S1921-067-2811 28-11/16" Damper Blade Seal

10 521X622 10 521X638

Condenser Partition Assembly RH (includes 537X998 and Damper Blade Seals) X Condenser Partition Assembly RH (includes 537X998 and Damper Blade Seals) X

11 521Y622 11 521Y638

Condenser Partition Assembly LH (includes 537Y998 and Damper Blade Seals)

12 8602-097

1/4" X 16-5/8" Rod

13 113-871

Blade Switch Bracket

13 113-924

Blade Switch Bracket

14 8406-150

Blade Switch

Exhaust damper assembly components are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

31 of 33

EXHAUST DAMPER ACTUATOR ASSEMBLIES
1
2 3

W180B****E

9 4
Manual 2110-1466G Page 32 of 33

5 6 7 5 8

9 SEXP-1051

Dwg. No. Part Number

Description

1012-351

1/4"-20 x 1/2" Screw

1012-174

1/4"-20 x 3-1/4 Bolt

1012-363

1/4"-20 x 3-1/4 Bolt

139-399

Actuator Arm

139-438

Actuator Arm

8602-008

Ball Joints

113-728

Actuator Bracket

113-844

Actuator Bracket

8602-093

Actuator

8602-100

Terminal Strip Cover

141-540

Mounting Plate

141-549

Mounting Plate

1012-201

1/4"-20 Steel Keps Hex Nut

1012-365

1/4"-20 Steel Keps Hex Nut

Exhaust damper assembly components are manufactured from stainless steel Code "S"
NOTE: Quantities listed above are totals for both right and left exhaust damper actuator assemblies.

575V TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY 910-2151 575V Transformer/Junction Box Assembly

3
4 5

SEXP-1050 A

W180B*Q

Dwg No. Part Number

Description

8615-063

Junction Box w/Hinged Cover

8407-078

Transformer 3PH 600V/460V 9 kVA

8614-062

3-Pole Enclosed Fuse Holder

8614-071

12 Amp Class CC Fuse

8607-014

3 Terminal Block 240V

Manual 2110-1466G

Page

33 of 33

Quick Start Guide
MEGA-TEC®/LC6000 Air Conditioning System

This quick start guide is designed to lead an installer through the steps necessary for setting up a Bard air conditioning system composed of MEGA-TEC wall-mount units paired with an LC6000 controller. See the latest versions of MEGA-TEC/LC6000 System Installation Instructions 2100-705, MEGA-TEC Service Instructions 2100-671 and LC6000 Service Instructions 2100-669 for more detailed information on the installation, service and maintenance of this Bard air conditioning system.
If installing a single MEGA-TEC wall-mount unit with a PGD or PGDx stand-alone display, refer to PGD manual 2100-734 or PGDx manual 2100-740 for information on setting up a stand-alone display for single unit operation.
The TEC-EYETM hand-held diagnostic tool and LC6000 controller will both be used in this installation. The TECEYE diagnostic tool is shipped inside the controller and a cable is included to connect it to the wall-mount unit control board.
NOTICE
It is important to check the software version during installation to ensure that the latest version has been installed. Current software versions, change log and installation instructions are available on the Bard website at http://www.bardhvac.com/ software-download/
SYSTEM SET-UP
Set up and configuration must be done to each MEGA-TEC wall-mount unit using the TEC-EYE hand-held diagnostic tool. Use the LC6000 controller for the remaining steps.
IMPORTANT: When working with circuit board components, Bard recommends the use of an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static electricity shorts to electronic controls.
Address each wall unit and select unit zone and unit of measure (TEC-EYE)
The address of the unit being set up will be listed in the upper right hand corner on the status screen. The available addresses are 1-14.
1. Remove outer and inner unit control panel doors.
2. Connect TEC-EYE to wall-mount unit control board.
3. Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
4. Press UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.
5. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Unit Address.

7. Press UP/DOWN keys to change address to value between 1 and 14.
NOTE: Each unit must have a unique address for the communication to work properly. Bard also recommends labeling each unit for ease in identification.
8. Press ENTER key to save and scroll to Zone.
9. If desired, press UP/DOWN keys to change the value to the desired zone (1, 2 or 3).
10. Press ENTER key to scroll to UOM (unit of measure).
11. Press UP/DOWN keys to change the value from USA to SI, NC, LON, CAN or UK. Units are preconfigured for each selection.
12. Press ENTER key to save.
Execute a self test on each unit to verify the equipment is functioning correctly (TEC-EYE)
1. Use UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Self Test A11.
2. Press ENTER key to scroll to Enable parameter.
3. Use UP/DOWN key to change value to Yes. The run test will begin.
See most recent version of Installation Instructions 2100-705 if additional information on run testing units is needed.
Clear unit alarm logs on each unit (TEC-EYE)
Units may have alarms logged due to testing. Unit alarm logs must be cleared at time of installation.To clear the wall-mount unit alarm logs:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.
3. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Delete alarm logs?.
6. Press UP/DOWN key to change value to YES; press ENTER key.
After first unit has been set up and configured, follow the above steps to set up and configure the remaining units.
The LC6000 controller will be used for the remaining steps in the set-up process.
Set LC Controller Date/Time (LC Controller)
1. Press MENU key to access the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.
3. Press the UP/DOWN keys to scroll to the Settings menu; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Date/Time menu; press ENTER key.

Manual: 2100-710A Date: 1-21-20

Supercedes: 2100-710 Page 1 of 2

5. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Date/Time change.

6. Press ENTER key to scroll to the desired value to be changed.

7. Press UP/DOWN keys to change the value.

8. Press ENTER key to save and scroll to top of screen.

9. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Timezone (if applicable). Follow steps 6-8 to change timezone.

10. Press the ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.

Configure sensors (LC Controller)

One remote temperature/humidity sensor is included with the controller. An additional remote indoor temperature sensor can be installed in Zone 1. Additional remote temperature/humidity sensors or temperature-only sensors (one per zone) can be installed in Zones 2 and 3 (if applicable). One optional outdoor temperature/humidity sensor can also be installed. The controller must be configured to match the installed sensors. The Zone 1 Indoor Humidity and Zone 1 Indoor Temperature sensors are enabled by default. The additional humidity and temperature sensors are disabled by default.

See Installation Instructions 2100-705 for information on configuring (enabling/disabling) sensors. If necessary, the sensors can be calibrated at this time too. For information on calibrating the sensors, see manual 2100-705.

See LC6000 Service Instructions manual 2100-669 for information on setting up emergency off, emergency ventilation and generator relays (if applicable).

Enter total number of units (LC Controller)

1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.

2. Use UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.

3. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.

4. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to General; press ENTER key.

5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Total Units.

6. Press UP/DOWN keys to adjust value to correct number of units.

7. Press ENTER key to save.

Verify units are online (LC Controller)

Once a unit is uniquely addressed, communication can be verified at the LC controller.

With the correct number of units set at the LC controller, each unit can be remotely viewed from the LC Information screens.

To view these screens:

1. Press ESCAPE key to view the Status screen. (May need to be pressed more than once.)

2. Press UP/DOWN key until the Quick Menu in

the lower right corner of the screen displays the

Information icon (

); press ENTER key.

3. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll through the Information screens until the desired unit Information screen appears.
In addition to being able to remotely view the units, an alarm will be generated on the LC controller for units not communicating.
Select economizer type for each zone (LC Controller)
Each zone can be configured to operate the economizers with different considerations. For more information on the different economizer choices, reference MEGA-TEC Service Manual 2100-671. The type of consideration can be changed to none, dry bulb, temperature and humidity or enthalpy. These settings will be communicated to the wall units while connected to the LC6000 to ensure all units operate the same.
To select free cooling type for each zone:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.
3. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Sys Config; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Zone FC Settings A2-4 (Zone 1), Zone FC Settings A3-4 (Zone 2) or Zone FC Settings A4-4 (Zone 3).
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to Type.
7. Press UP/DOWN keys to change economizer type to None, Drybulb, TempHum or Enthalpy.
8. Press ENTER key to save.
Clear controller alarm logs (LC Controller)
The LC6000 may have alarms logged due to bench testing. Controller alarm logs must be cleared at time of installation. To clear the LC controller alarm logs:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP/DOWN/ENTER keys to enter password 1313.
3. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP/DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5. Press ENTER key to scroll to Delete alarm logs?
6. Press UP/DOWN key to change value to YES; press ENTER key.
7. Press ESCAPE key several times to return to Main Menu screen.
Once all the installation steps have been completed, all alarms and alarm logs have been cleared and system verification and run test results were satisfactory, the installation can now be considered "complete".

Manual: 2100-710A Page 2 of 2

Jobsite Startup and Commissioning Report
Shelter (Name/Number): Commissioned By (Name): Installation By (Company): Installer Address/Phone No.:
Date Commissioned:

Shipping Inspection Inspect each unit for the following:

Yes No Do any of the units have visible damage from falling over during transit?

Yes No Are any of the Condenser Coils located at the upper front of each unit Damaged?

Yes No Are any of the Condenser fan assemblies located in the top of each unit damaged?

Yes

Inspect the lower front door and side panels of each unit. Are all door panels intact and air/water tight?

Yes

Inspect the blower wheel/housing by looking into the supply opening of each unit. Is the blower wheel centered and able to spin inside the blower housing?

Yes No Inspect all accessories including supply and return louvers. Are they free of damage?

Model and Serial Numbers of HVAC units

Unit Model Number

Serial Number

#4
Model and Serial Number of Controller Model Number

Serial Number

HVAC Unit Installation Verify the following:

Yes

Verify rain flashing is installed at the top of each unit. Has caulk or sealant been applied per installation instructions to avoid water intrusion into each unit?

Yes

Verify all high voltage wire routing requirements are met. Are all conduit connections tightened and sealed for weatherization?

Yes

Verify all communication wire routing requirements are met. Are all conduit connections tightened and sealed for weatherization?

Yes

Are all HVAC Unit outdoor service and airflow clearances on the sides, front, bottom, and top met?

Yes

A 24" minimum distance is needed between the supply and return openings and equipment in the room. Are all HVAC Unit indoor supply and return clearances met?

Controller and Unit Communication Wiring Verify the following:

7960-788 Revised: 2-13-17

Commissioning Report

Page 1 of 3

Yes

Are EMI filters installed on the 2 wire shielded cable ran from the controller to the units?

A continuity check between the 2 communications wires with a multimeter will verify

proper "+" and "-"connections have been made for the 2 wire shielded cable. This may

Yes No be checked at the unit or controller. No continuity should be observed. If continuity is

observed, check communications wire "+" and "-"connections for reversal. Has a

continuity check been performed with a multimeter?

HVAC Unit #1 Setup Verify the following:

Yes No Is unit addressed as #1 using the TEC-EYE service tool?

Yes No Indoor blower, economizer, compressor, condenser fan, electric heat is operational?

High Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.

Low Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.
Measure Voltage at unit circuit breaker with Multimeter. If power is below 220 Volts, disconnect power and move red wire on low voltage transformer to 208V terminal. HVAC Unit #2 Setup Verify the following: Yes No Is unit addressed as #2 using the TEC-EYE service tool? Yes No Indoor blower, economizer, compressor, condenser fan, electric heat is operational?
High Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.

Low Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.
Measure Voltage at unit circuit breaker with Multimeter. If power is below 220 Volts, disconnect power and move red wire on low voltage transformer to 208V terminal. HVAC Unit #3 Setup Verify the following: Yes No Is unit addressed as #3 using the TEC-EYE service tool? Yes No Indoor blower, economizer, compressor, condenser fan, electric heat is operational?
High Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.

Low Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.
Measure Voltage at unit circuit breaker with Multimeter. If power is below 220 Volts, disconnect power and move red wire on low voltage transformer to 208V terminal. HVAC Unit #4 Setup Verify the following: Yes No Is unit addressed as #4 using the TEC-EYE service tool? Yes No Indoor blower, economizer, compressor, condenser fan, electric heat is operational?
High Pressure (psi) measurement from TEC-EYE service tool.

7960-788 Revised: 2-13-17

Commissioning Report

Page 2 of 3

Outdoor Ambient Temperature

Indoor Room Temperature

Controller Setup Verify the following:

Yes No Are all hard wired alarms (NOC) and/or Ethernet cable connected and functional?

Yes No Are all remote indoor temperature and humidity sensors connected and operational?

Yes No Is the time and date set in the controller?

Yes

Warm the indoor temperature and humidity sensor with a blow dryer or heat gun. Be careful not to overheat and damage the sensor. Do all units operate?

Yes No Clear all alarms in the controller. Do all alarms stay inactive (alarms clear)?

Yes No Are the supply and return grilles the correct model for the product?

Yes No Are all supply grille fins adjusted to force air towards the room floor?

Record indoor temperature displayed on the controller.

Record indoor humidity displayed on the controller.

Power Supply Voltage at unit controller measured with Multimeter.

Controller Software Version:
Final Jobsite review Verify the following: Yes No Are all installation tools including driver bits, pliers, and screwdrivers accounted for? Yes No Are all HVAC unit panels secured including control panel, filter, and front doors? Yes No Are all alarms cleared from the controller? Yes No If the site is monitored, have external parties received notification the job is complete?

Warranty Registration
Trained installers and contractors are eligible for an extended warranty. Go to www.bardhvac.com and select "Distributor Access". Log into the extended warranty program using your username and password provided at the end of the training class. Standard warranty registration is available at www.bardhvac.com under "Warranty Registration". When completed, store this document in the shelter with manuals for future reference.

3D Barcode for Extended Warranty

3D Barcode for Standard Warranty

7960-788 Revised: 2-13-17

Commissioning Report

Page 3 of 3

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

Exporting Alarm Logs on UPC3 Controller

These instructions detail the process for exporting alarm logs on all UPC3 controllers, including the LC6000-200, MEGA-TEC®, MULTI-TEC® and FUSIONTEC® WR series. This will need to be completed when contacting Technical Service.
Tools and Supplies Needed
· Laptop computer
· USB cable
· Personal anti-static grounding strap
Instructions
IMPORTANT: Bard recommends the use of personal grounding straps to prevent static electricity shorts to electronic controls.
To export an alarm log:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Alarm Export (see Figure 1).
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to File Name.
NOTE: Make sure Memory type is set as INTERNAL FLASH MEMORY to ensure proper download.

FIGURE 1
7. Press UP or DOWN key to change the AL_EXPORT number, if desired.
8. Press ENTER key to scroll to Confirm? 9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to YES;
press ENTER key. 10. After download is complete, the Operation done
screen will appear (see Figure 2). FIGURE 2

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506
www.bardhvac.com

Manual:

7960-825A

Supersedes: 7960-825

Date:

7-27-22

Page

1 of 2

NOTE: Do not connect the control board to the laptop using the USB cable before exporting as this will cause a Cannot access file message to appear and the log will not be saved. If this happens, remove USB connection, press ESCAPE key and redo Steps 8 and 9.
11. Connect one end of USB cable to the short USB adapter cable on the bottom left corner of the control board (see Figure 3). Connect other end of USB cable to laptop.
FIGURE 3

12. Once the connection has been made between control board and laptop, the laptop screen should display as shown in Figure 4. The unit will export the alarm log as an Excel file.
This completes the software update process.

USB Adapter
Cable

FIGURE 4

Manual 7960-825A Page 2 of 2

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

Exporting 7 Day I/O Logs on UPC3 Controller

These instructions detail the process for exporting 7 day I/O logs on all UPC3 controllers, including the LC6000-200, MEGA-TEC®, MULTI-TEC® and FUSIONTEC® WR series. This will need to be completed when contacting Technical Service.
Tools and Supplies Needed
· Laptop computer
· USB cable
· Personal anti-static grounding strap
Instructions
IMPORTANT: Bard recommends the use of personal grounding straps to prevent static electricity shorts to electronic controls.
To export an alarm log:
1. Press MENU key to go to the Main Menu screen.
2. Use UP or DOWN keys and ENTER key to enter USER password 1313.
3. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Settings; press ENTER key.
4. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to Initialization; press ENTER key.
5. Press UP or DOWN keys to scroll to I/O Log Export; (see Figure 1).
NOTE: The screen descriptions may look slightly different depending on which controller is being accessed.
6. Press ENTER key to scroll to File Name.
NOTE: Make sure Memory type is set as INTERNAL FLASH MEMORY to ensure proper download.

FIGURE 1
7. Press UP or DOWN key to change the file name number, if desired.
NOTE: The first two letters of the file name will vary depending on which controller is being accessed.
8. Press ENTER key to scroll to Confirm? 9. Press UP or DOWN key to change value to YES;
press ENTER key. 10. After download is complete, the Operation done
screen will appear (see Figure 2). FIGURE 2

Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. Bryan, Ohio 43506
www.bardhvac.com

Manual:

7960-826A

Supersedes: 7960-826

Date:

7-27-22

Page

1 of 2

12. Once the connection has been made between control board and laptop, the laptop screen should display as shown in Figure 4. The unit will export the I/O logs as Excel files.
This completes the software update process.

USB Adapter
Cable

FIGURE 4

Manual 7960-826A Page 2 of 2

Microsoft Word 2013